Saturn 2008 Astra Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-24

: Saturn Saturn-2008-Saturn-Astra-Owners-Manual-819063 saturn-2008-saturn-astra-owners-manual-819063 saturn pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 304 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2008 Saturn Astra BookTOC
Seats and Restraints
Keys, Doors and Windows
Storage
- Storage
Instruments and Controls
Lighting
- Lighting
Infotainment
- Audio System(s)
Climate Controls
- Climate Controls
  - Climate Control System
  - Outlet Adjustment
Driving and Operating
Vehicle Service and Care
Technical Data
- Vehicle Identification
  - Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  - Service Parts Identification Label
- Capacities and Specifications
  - Capacities and Specifications
Customer Information
Index

Seats and Restraints ......... 1-1

Front Seats .................... 1-2

Rear Seats .................... 1-7

Safety Belts ................... 1-8

Airbag System .............. 1-23

Child Restraints ............. 1-37

Keys, Doors and

Windows ............................ 2-1

Keys ............................. 2-2

Doors and Locks ............ 2-5

Theft-Deterrent Systems ... 2-7

Windows ...................... 2-10

Mirrors ......................... 2-12

Sunroof ........................ 2-13

Storage .............................. 3-1

Storage ......................... 3-1

Instruments and

Controls ............................. 4-1

Instrument Panel

Overview .................... 4-2

Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators ............ 4-11

Driver Information

Center (DIC) ............. 4-26

OnStar

System ............ 4-38

Lighting ............................. 5-1

Lighting ......................... 5-1

Infotainment ...................... 6-1

Audio System(s) ............. 6-1

Climate Controls ............... 7-1

Climate Controls ............. 7-1

Driving and Operating ....... 8-1

Starting and Operating

Your Vehicle ................ 8-2

Driving Your Vehicle ...... 8-16

Fuel ............................ 8-35

Vehicle Service

and Care ............................ 9-1

Service .......................... 9-2

Owner Checks ................ 9-5

Headlamp Aiming .......... 9-26

Bulb Replacement ......... 9-28

Electrical System ........... 9-33

Tires ........................... 9-38

Tire Changing ............... 9-60

Jump Starting ............... 9-68

Towing ........................ 9-72

Appearance Care .......... 9-72

Technical Data ................. 10-1

Vehicle Identiﬁcation ...... 10-1

Capacities and

Speciﬁcations ............ 10-2

Customer Information ...... 11-1

Customer Information ..... 11-1

Reporting Safety

Defects ................... 11-13

Vehicle Data Recording

and Privacy ............. 11-15

Index ................................... i-1

2008 Saturn Astra Owner Manual M

SATURN and the SATURN Emblem

are registered trademarks, and

the name ASTRA is a trademark of

Saturn Corporation. GENERAL

MOTORS and GM are registered

trademarks of General Motors

Corporation.

This manual includes the latest

information at the time it was

printed. Saturn reserves the right to

make changes after that time

without further notice.

This manual describes features that

may or may not be on your

speciﬁc vehicle.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for

quick reference.

Canadian Owners

A French language copy of this

manual can be obtained from your

dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, Incorporated

P.O. Box 07130

Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123

helminc.com

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire de

ce guide en français auprès de

concessionnaire ou à l’adresse

Helm Incorporated

P.O. Box 07130

Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123

helminc.com

Using this Manual

Read this owner manual from

beginning to end to learn about the

vehicle’s features and controls.

Pictures and words work together to

explain things.

ii Preface

Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 94701908 B Second Printing

Index

To quickly locate information about

the vehicle use the Index in the

back of the manual. It is an

alphabetical list of what is in the

manual and the page number where

it can be found.

Cautions and Notices

There are a number of safety

cautions in this book. A box with the

word CAUTION is used to tell

about things that could cause injury

if the warning is ignored.

{CAUTION

These mean there is something

that could hurt you or other

people.

Cautions tell what the hazard is and

what to do to avoid or reduce the

hazard. Read these cautions.

A circle with a slash through it is a

safety symbol which means “Do

Not,” “Do Not do this” or “Do Not let

this happen.”

Notices are also used in this

manual.

Notice: These mean there is

something that could damage

your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that

can damage the vehicle. Many times,

this damage would not be covered by

the vehicle’s warranty, and it could

be costly. The notice tells what to do

to help avoid the damage.

There are also warning labels on

the vehicle which use the same

words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Other manuals may use CAUTION

and NOTICE warnings in different

colors or in different words.

Vehicle Symbols

The vehicle has components and

labels that use symbols instead

of text. Symbols are shown along

with the text describing the operation

or information relating to a speciﬁc

component, control, message,

gage, or indicator.

Preface iii

✍NOTES

iv Preface

Seats and

Restraints

Front Seats

Manual Seats .....................1-2

Seat Height Adjuster ...........1-2

Lumbar Seat Adjustment ....1-3

Reclining Seatbacks ...........1-3

Head Restraints ..................1-5

Heated Seats .....................1-6

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation ...........1-7

Safety Belts

Safety Belts ........................1-8

How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly ..........................1-12

Lap-Shoulder Belt .............1-17

Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy .......................1-21

Safety Belt Extender .........1-22

Safety Belt Check .............1-22

Care of Safety Belts .........1-22

Replacing Safety Belt

System Parts After

a Crash ...........................1-23

Airbag System

Airbag System ..................1-23

Where Are the Airbags? ...1-25

When Should an Airbag

Inﬂate? ............................1-27

What Makes an Airbag

Inﬂate? ............................1-28

How Does an Airbag

Restrain? ........................1-28

What Will You See After

an Airbag Inﬂates? ..........1-29

Passenger Sensing

System ............................1-30

Servicing Your

Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ............................1-34

Adding Equipment to

Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ............................1-35

Airbag System Check .......1-36

Replacing Airbag System

Parts After a Crash .........1-36

Child Restraints

Older Children ..................1-37

Infants and Young

Children ..........................1-38

Child Restraint Systems ....1-41

Where to Put the

Restraint .........................1-43

Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children

(LATCH) ..........................1-45

Replacing LATCH

System Parts After

a Crash ...........................1-50

Securing Child

Restraints (Rear Seat) .....1-50

Securing Child Restraints

(Right Front Seat) ...........1-53

Seats and Restraints 1-1

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION

You can lose control of the

vehicle if you try to adjust a

manual driver’s seat while the

vehicle is moving. The sudden

movement could startle and

confuse you, or make you push

a pedal when you do not want

to. Adjust the driver’s seat only

when the vehicle is not moving.

To move a manual seat forward or

rearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desired

position and release the bar.

Try to move the seat with your body

to be sure the seat is locked in place.

Seat Height Adjuster

To raise and lower the manual

seat, move the lever up or down

repeatedly until the seat is at

the desired height.

1-2 Seats and Restraints

Lumbar Seat Adjustment

On seats with this feature, turn the

knob clockwise or counterclockwise

to increase or decrease the

lumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION

You can lose control of the

vehicle if you try to adjust

the seat while the vehicle is

moving. The sudden movement

could startle and confuse you,

or make you push a pedal when

you do not want to. Adjust the

driver’s seat only when the

vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION

Sitting in a reclined position

when your vehicle is in motion

can be dangerous. Even if you

buckle up, your safety belts

cannot do their job when you

are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its

job because it will not be against

your body. Instead, it will be in

front of you. In a crash, you

could go into it, receiving neck

or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job

either. In a crash, the belt could

go up over your abdomen. The

belt forces would be there, not

at your pelvic bones. This could

cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the

vehicle is in motion, have the

seatback upright. Then sit well

back in the seat and wear your

safety belt properly.

Seats and Restraints 1-3

To adjust a manual reclining

seatback, turn the knob. Do not lean

on the seatback while adjusting it.

Seatback Latches

(Three Door Model)

For easy entry/exit to the rear seats

on three door models:

1. Lift the lever, and tilt the seatback

forward.

2. Lower the lever and move the

entire seat completely forward.

{CAUTION

If the seatback is not locked, it

could move forward in a sudden

stop or crash. That could cause

injury to the person sitting

there. Always push and pull

on the seatback to be sure it

is locked.

To return the seat to the upright

position:

1. Remove any objects in front of or

behind the seat.

2. Move the entire seat rearward.

3. Lift the lever located on the

outboard side of the seat

and return the seatback to

the upright position.

4. Lower the lever then push and

pull on the seatback to be sure

it is locked in place.

1-4 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

The vehicle’s front seats have

adjustable head restraints.

{CAUTION

With head restraints that are

not installed and adjusted

properly, there is a greater

chance that occupants will

suffer a neck/spinal injury

in a crash. Do not drive until

the head restraints for all

occupants are installed and

adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that

the top of the restraint is at the

same height as the top of the

occupant’s head.

This position reduces the chance of

a neck injury in a crash.

To adjust the head restraint, press

the button located on the side of the

head restraint. Pull up or push down

on the restraint to adjust it.

Try to move the head restraint after

the button is released to make

sure that it is locked in place.

The vehicle’s front seat head

restraints are not designed to

be removed.

Seats and Restraints 1-5

Active Head Restraint System

The vehicle has an active head

restraint system in the front seating

positions.

These automatically tilt forward to

reduce the risk of neck injury if

the vehicle is hit from behind.

Rear Seat Headrests

The vehicle has headrests in all

seating positions of the rear seats.

The headrests in the rear outboard

positions adjust like the front

seat head restraints.

To adjust the headrest in the rear

seat center position, pull up to

raise it.

To lower the headrest, press the

buttons located on the top of

the seatback and push the head

rest down.

The vehicle’s rear seat headrests

are not designed to be removed.

Heated Seats

On vehicles with heated front seats,

the controls for each seat are located

on the center of the instrument panel.

To operate the heated seats the

ignition must be on.

M(Heated Seat): Press this

button to turn on the heated seat.

The light on the button will come on

to indicate that the feature is working.

Press the button to cycle through

the temperature settings of high,

medium, and low and to turn the

heat to the seat off. The number of

indicator lights above the button will

show the level of heat selected: three

for high, two for medium, and one

for low.

1-6 Seats and Restraints

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

{CAUTION

If the seatback is not locked, it

could move forward in a sudden

stop or crash. That could cause

injury to the person sitting

there. Always push and pull

on the seatback to be sure it

is locked.

{CAUTION

A safety belt that is improperly

routed, not properly attached,

or twisted will not provide the

protection needed in a crash.

The person wearing the belt

could be seriously injured.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

After raising the rear seatback,

always check to be sure that

the safety belts are properly

routed and attached, and are

not twisted.

Folding the Seatback

Notice: Folding a rear seat with

the safety belts still fastened may

cause damage to the seat or the

safety belts. Always unbuckle the

safety belts and return them to

their normal stowed position

before folding a rear seat.

Before folding the seatback down,

the safety belt must be unbuckled

and not in the storage clip. The

front seat must be moved all

the way forward, and not reclined.

The headrest must be completely

lowered.

To lower the seatback:

1. Press the button located on the

top of the seatback to release it.

2. Fold the seatback forward.

Seats and Restraints 1-7

To return the seat to the sitting

position:

1. Make sure the safety belt is

through the storage clip.

2. Lift the seatback and push it

rearward until it is locked in

the sitting position.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to

make sure it is locked.

4. Remove the safety belt from the

storage clip.

The seatback must be locked or

you will not be able to pull out

and use the rear center safety

belt. Always push and pull on the

seatback to be sure it is locked.

Safety Belts

This section of the manual describes

how to use safety belts properly.

It also describes some things not

to do with safety belts.

{CAUTION

Do not let anyone ride where he

or she cannot wear a safety belt

properly. If you are in a crash

and you are not wearing a safety

belt, your injuries can be much

worse. You can hit things inside

the vehicle harder or be ejected

from it and be seriously injured

or killed. In the same crash, you

might not be, if you are buckled

up. Always fasten your safety

belt, and check that your

passenger(s) are restrained

properly too.

1-8 Seats and Restraints

{CAUTION

It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a

collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

safety belts. Be sure everyone

in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as a

reminder to buckle the safety belts.

See Safety Belt Reminders on

page 4-14.

In most states and in all Canadian

provinces, the law requires

wearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be

in a crash. If you do have a crash,

you do not know if it will be a

serious one.

A few crashes are mild, and some

crashes can be so serious that even

buckled up, a person would not

survive. But most crashes are in

between. In many of them, people

who buckle up can survive and

sometimes walk away. Without

safety belts they could have been

badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety

belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.

In most crashes buckling up does

matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,

you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

it is just a seat on wheels.

Seats and Restraints 1-9

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the

vehicle. The rider does not stop. The person keeps going until

stopped by something. In a real

vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-10 Seats and Restraints

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as

the vehicle does. You get more time

to stop. You stop over more distance,

and your strongest bones take the

forces. That is why safety belts make

such good sense.

Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle

after a crash if I am wearing a

safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are

wearing a safety belt or not. But

your chance of being conscious

during and after an accident, so

you can unbuckle and get out, is

much greater if you are belted.

And you can unbuckle a safety

belt, even if you are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why

should I have to wear safety

belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental

systems only; so they work with

safety belts — not instead of

them. Whether or not an airbag

is provided, all occupants still

have to buckle up to get the most

protection. That is true not only in

frontal collisions, but especially in

side and other collisions.

Seats and Restraints 1-11

Q: If I am a good driver, and I

never drive far from home,

why should I wear safety

belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,

but if you are in a crash — even

one that is not your fault — you

and your passenger(s) can be

hurt. Being a good driver does not

protect you from things beyond

your control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within

25 miles (40 km) of home.

And the greatest number of

serious injuries and deaths

occur at speeds of less than

40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly

This section is only for people of

adult size.

Be aware that there are special

things to know about safety belts

and children. And there are different

rules for smaller children and infants.

If a child will be riding in the vehicle,

see Older Children on page 1-37

or Infants and Young Children on

page 1-38. Follow those rules for

everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupants

to buckle up. Statistics show that

unbelted people are hurt more often

in crashes than those who are

wearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled up

can be thrown out of the vehicle

in a crash. And they can strike

others in the vehicle who are

wearing safety belts.

First, before you or your

passenger(s) wear a safety belt,

there is important information

you should know.

Sit up straight and always keep

your feet on the ﬂoor in front of you.

The lap part of the belt should be

worn low and snug on the hips, just

touching the thighs. In a crash, this

applies force to the strong pelvic

bones and you would be less

likely to slide under the lap belt.

1-12 Seats and Restraints

If you slid under it, the belt would

apply force on your abdomen.

This could cause serious or even

fatal injuries. The shoulder belt

should go over the shoulder and

across the chest. These parts of

the body are best able to take belt

restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is a

sudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.

It will not give as much

protection this way.

{CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if

your shoulder belt is too loose.

In a crash, you would move

forward too much, which could

increase injury. The shoulder

belt should ﬁt snugly against

your body.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The lap belt is too loose.

It will not give nearly as

much protection this way.

{CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if your

lap belt is too loose. In a crash,

you could slide under the lap

belt and apply force on your

abdomen. This could cause

serious or even fatal injuries.

The lap belt should be worn

low and snug on the hips, just

touching the thighs.

Seats and Restraints 1-13

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong

buckle.

{CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if

your belt is buckled in the

wrong place like this. In a

crash, the belt would go up

over your abdomen. The belt

forces would be there, not on

the pelvic bones. This could

cause serious internal injuries.

Always buckle your belt into

the buckle nearest you.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is over an armrest.

1-14 Seats and Restraints

{CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if

your belt goes over an armrest

like this. The belt would be

much too high. In a crash,

you can slide under the belt.

The belt force would then be

applied on the abdomen, not on

the pelvic bones, and that could

cause serious or fatal injuries.

Be sure the belt goes under the

armrests.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is worn under

the arm. It should be worn over

the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION

You can be seriously injured

if you wear the shoulder belt

under your arm. In a crash,

your body would move too far

forward, which would increase

the chance of head and neck

injury. Also, the belt would

apply too much force to the

ribs, which are not as strong as

shoulder bones. You could also

severely injure internal organs

like your liver or spleen. The

shoulder belt should go over the

shoulder and across the chest.

Seats and Restraints 1-15

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is behind the body.

{CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by

not wearing the lap-shoulder

belt properly. In a crash, you

would not be restrained by the

shoulder belt. Your body could

move too far forward increasing

the chance of head and neck

injury. You might also slide

under the lap belt. The belt

force would then be applied

right on the abdomen. That

could cause serious or fatal

injuries. The shoulder belt

should go over the shoulder

and across the chest.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is twisted across

the body.

1-16 Seats and Restraints

{CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by

a twisted belt. In a crash, you

would not have the full width

of the belt to spread impact

forces. If a belt is twisted,

make it straight so it can work

properly, or ask your dealer/

retailer to ﬁx it.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

All seating positions in the vehicle

have a lap-shoulder belt.

Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder

belt properly.

1. Adjust the seat so you can sit up

straight. To see how, see “Seats”

in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let

it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if

you pull the belt across you very

quickly. If this happens, let the

belt go back slightly to unlock it.

Then pull the belt across you

more slowly.

If you ever pull the shoulder

portion of a passenger belt out

all the way, you may engage the

child restraint locking feature.

If this happens, just let the belt go

back all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into the

buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to

make sure it is secure. If the belt

is not long enough, see Safety

Belt Extender on page 1-22.

Make sure the release button on

the buckle is positioned so you

would be able to unbuckle the

safety belt quickly if necessary.

Seats and Restraints 1-17

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt

height adjuster, move it to the

height that is right for you.

Improper shoulder belt height

adjustment could reduce the

effectiveness of the safety belt

in a crash. See “Shoulder Belt

Height Adjustment” later in this

section.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull

up on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull

stitching on the safety belt

through the latch plate to fully

tighten the lap belt on smaller

occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the button

on the buckle. The belt should go

back out of the way. When the safety

belt is not in use, slide the latch plate

up the safety belt webbing. The latch

plate should rest on the stitching on

the safety belt, near the guide loop

on the side wall.

Before you close a door, be sure

the belt is out of the way. If you slam

the door on it, you can damage

both the belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt

height adjuster for the driver

and right front passenger position.

Adjust the height so that the

shoulder portion of the belt is

centered on your shoulder. The belt

should be away from the face and

neck, but not falling off the shoulder.

Incorrect positioning of the shoulder

belt can reduce the effectiveness of

the safety belt.

1-18 Seats and Restraints

To move it, push the button on the

front of the height adjuster and

move the height adjuster to

the desired position.

After you move the adjuster to

where you want it, try to move it

down without pushing the button

to make sure it has locked into

position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

The vehicle has safety belt

pretensioners for the front outboard

occupants. Although you cannot see

them, they are part of the safety belt

assembly. They can help tighten the

safety belts during the early stages

of a moderate to severe frontal and

near frontal crash if the threshold

conditions for pretensioner activation

are met. And, if the vehicle has

side impact airbags, safety belt

pretensioners can help tighten

the safety belts in a side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If

they activate in a crash, you will need

to get new ones, and probably other

new parts for the safety belt system.

See Replacing Safety Belt System

Parts After a Crash on page 1-23.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort

Guides

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides

may provide added safety belt

comfort for older children who have

outgrown booster seats and for some

adults. When installed on a shoulder

belt, the comfort guide positions the

belt away from the neck and head.

There is one guide for each

outboard passenger position in the

rear seat. Here is how to install

a comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from the

side of the seatback to remove

the guide from its storage pocket.

Seats and Restraints 1-19

2. Place the guide over the belt and

insert the two edges of the belt

into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not

twisted and it lies ﬂat. The elastic

cord must be under the belt

and the guide on top.

{CAUTION

A safety belt that is not

properly worn may not provide

the protection needed in a

crash. The person wearing the

belt could be seriously injured.

The shoulder belt should go

over the shoulder and across

the chest. These parts of the

body are best able to take belt

restraining forces.

1-20 Seats and Restraints

4. Buckle, position, and release

the safety belt as described

previously in this section.

Make sure that the shoulder

belt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort

guide, squeeze the belt edges

together so that you can take them

out of the guide. Push the guide into

the pocket on the side of seatback.

Properly secure the guide loop

before folding the seatback. The

comfort guide and vehicle can be

damaged while closing a door if it is

not properly secured in its storage

location.

Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone,

including pregnant women. Like

all occupants, they are more likely

to be seriously injured if they do

not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a

lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion

should be worn as low as possible,

below the rounding, throughout

the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is

to protect the mother. When a safety

belt is worn properly, it is more likely

that the fetus will not be hurt in a

crash. For pregnant women, as for

anyone, the key to making safety

belts effective is wearing them

properly.

Seats and Restraints 1-21

Safety Belt Extender

If the safety belt will fasten around

you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long

enough, your dealer/retailer will order

you an extender. When you go in to

order it, take the heaviest coat you

will wear, so the extender will be

long enough for you. To help avoid

personal injury, do not let someone

else use it, and use it only for the

seat it is made to ﬁt. The extender

has been designed for adults.

Never use it for securing child seats.

To wear it, attach it to the regular

safety belt. For more information,

see the instruction sheet that comes

with the extender.

Safety Belt Check

Now and then, make sure the safety

belt reminder light and all your belts,

buckles, latch plates, retractors and

anchorages are working properly.

Look for any other loose or damaged

safety belt system parts. If you see

anything that might keep a safety belt

system from doing its job, have it

repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts

may not protect you in a crash. They

can rip apart under impact forces.

If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new

one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminder

light is working. See Safety Belt

Reminders on page 4-14 for more

information.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.

See Care of Safety Belts on

page 1-22.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION

Do not bleach or dye safety

belts. If you do, it may severely

weaken them. In a crash, they

might not be able to provide

adequate protection. Clean

safety belts only with mild

soap and lukewarm water.

1-22 Seats and Restraints

Replacing Safety Belt

System Parts After

a Crash

{CAUTION

A crash can damage the safety

belt system in the vehicle.

A damaged safety belt system

may not properly protect the

person using it, resulting in

serious injury or even death

in a crash. To help make sure

the safety belt systems are

working properly after a crash,

have them inspected and any

necessary replacements made

as soon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement of

safety belts may not be necessary.

But the safety belt assemblies that

were used during any crash may

have been stressed or damaged.

See your dealer/retailer to have the

safety belt assemblies inspected or

replaced.

New parts and repairs may be

necessary even if the safety belt

system was not being used at

the time of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensioners

checked if the vehicle has been in a

crash, or if the airbag readiness light

stays on after you start the vehicle or

while you are driving. See Airbag

Readiness Light on page 4-14.

Airbag System

Your vehicle has the following

airbags:

•A frontal airbag for the driver.

•A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.

•A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.

•A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right front

passenger.

•A roof-rail airbag for the driver

and the passenger seated

directly behind the driver.

•A roof-rail airbag for the

right front passenger and the

passenger seated directly behind

the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will

have the word AIRBAG embossed in

the trim or on an attached label near

the deployment opening.

Seats and Restraints 1-23

For frontal airbags, the word

AIRBAG will appear on the middle

part of the steering wheel for

the driver and on the instrument

panel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impact

airbags, the word AIRBAG

will appear on the side of the

seatback closest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the word

AIRBAG will appear along the

headliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplement

the protection provided by safety

belts. Even though today’s airbags

are also designed to help reduce

the risk of injury from the force of

an inﬂating bag, all airbags must

inﬂate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things

to know about the airbag system:

{CAUTION

You can be severely injured or

killed in a crash if you are not

wearing your safety belt — even

if you have airbags. Wearing

your safety belt during a crash

helps reduce your chance of

hitting things inside the vehicle

or being ejected from it. Airbags

are “supplemental restraints” to

the safety belts. All airbags are

designed to work with safety

belts, but do not replace them.

{CAUTION

Frontal airbags are designed to

deploy in moderate to severe

frontal and near frontal crashes.

They are not designed to inﬂate

in rollover, rear crashes, or in

many side crashes.

Seat-mounted side impact

airbags and roof-rail airbags are

designed to inﬂate in moderate

to severe crashes where

something hits the side of your

vehicle. They are not designed

to inﬂate in frontal, in rollover,

or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle

should wear a safety belt

properly — whether or not there

is an airbag for that person.

1-24 Seats and Restraints

{CAUTION

Airbags inﬂate with great force,

faster than the blink of an eye.

Anyone who is up against, or

very close to, any airbag when

it inﬂates can be seriously

injured or killed. Do not sit

unnecessarily close to the

airbag, as you would be if you

were sitting on the edge of your

seat or leaning forward. Safety

belts help keep you in position

before and during a crash.

Always wear your safety belt,

even with airbags. The driver

should sit as far back as

possible while still maintaining

control of the vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on

or sleep against the door or side

windows in seating positions

with seat-mounted side impact

airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.

{CAUTION

Airbags plus lap-shoulder

belts offer the best protection

for adults, but not for young

children and infants. Neither

the vehicle’s safety belt system

nor its airbag system is

designed for them. Young

children and infants need the

protection that a child restraint

system can provide. Always

secure children properly in

your vehicle. To read how, see

Older Children on page 1-37 or

Infants and Young Children on

page 1-38.

There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument panel cluster,

which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag

electrical system for malfunctions.

The light tells you if there is an

electrical problem. See Airbag

Readiness Light on page 4-14

for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the

middle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal

airbag is in the instrument panel on

the passenger’s side.

Seats and Restraints 1-25

The seat-mounted side impact

airbags for the driver and right front

passenger are in the side of the

seatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,

right front passenger, and second

row outboard passengers are in the

ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION

If something is between an

occupant and an airbag, the

airbag might not inﬂate

properly or it might force the

object into that person causing

severe injury or even death.

The path of an inﬂating airbag

must be kept clear. Do not put

anything between an occupant

and an airbag, and do not

attach or put anything on the

steering wheel hub or on or

near any other airbag covering.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Do not use seat accessories

that block the inﬂation path of

a seat-mounted side impact

airbag.

Never secure anything to the

roof of a vehicle with roof-rail

airbags by routing a rope or

tie down through any door or

window opening. If you do, the

path of an inﬂating roof-rail

airbag will be blocked.

Driver Side shown,

Passenger Side similar

1-26 Seats and Restraints

When Should an Airbag

Inﬂate?

Frontal airbags are designed to

inﬂate in moderate to severe frontal

or near-frontal crashes to help

reduce the potential for severe

injuries mainly to the driver’s or right

front passenger’s head and chest.

However, they are only designed

to inﬂate if the impact exceeds

a predetermined deployment

threshold. Deployment thresholds

are used to predict how severe a

crash is likely to be in time for the

airbags to inﬂate and help restrain

the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will

or should deploy is not based on

how fast your vehicle is traveling.

It depends largely on what you hit,

the direction of the impact, and how

quickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inﬂate at

different crash speeds. For example:

•If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inﬂate at

a different crash speed than if the

vehicle hits a moving object.

•If the vehicle hits an object that

deforms, the airbags could inﬂate

at a different crash speed than if

the vehicle hits an object that

does not deform.

•If the vehicle hits a narrow object

(like a pole), the airbags could

inﬂate at a different crash speed

than if the vehicle hits a wide

object (like a wall).

•If the vehicle goes into an object

at an angle, the airbags could

inﬂate at a different crash speed

than if the vehicle goes straight

into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with

speciﬁc vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended to

inﬂate during vehicle rollovers, rear

impacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle has

dual-stage frontal airbags.

Dual-stage airbags adjust the

restraint according to crash severity.

The vehicle has electronic frontal

sensors, which help the sensing

system distinguish between a

moderate frontal impact and a

more severe frontal impact. For

moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage

airbags inﬂate at a level less than full

deployment. For more severe frontal

impacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted

side impact and roof-rail airbags.

See Airbag System on page 1-23.

Seat-mounted side impact and

roof-rail airbags are intended to

inﬂate in moderate to severe side

crashes. Seat-mounted side impact

and roof-rail airbags will inﬂate if

the crash severity is above the

system’s designed threshold level.

The threshold level can vary with

speciﬁc vehicle design.

Seats and Restraints 1-27

Seat-mounted side impact and

roof-rail airbags are not intended to

inﬂate in frontal impacts, near-frontal

impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.

A seat-mounted side impact

airbag is intended to deploy on

the side of the vehicle that is struck.

A roof-rail airbag is intended to

deploy on the side of the vehicle

that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one

can say whether an airbag should

have inﬂated simply because of

the damage to a vehicle or because

of what the repair costs were.

For frontal airbags, inﬂation is

determined by what the vehicle hits,

the angle of the impact, and how

quickly the vehicle slows down.

For seat-mounted side impact and

roof-rail airbags, deployment is

determined by the location and

severity of the side impact.

What Makes an Airbag

Inﬂate?

In a deployment event, the sensing

system sends an electrical signal

triggering a release of gas from the

inﬂator. Gas from the inﬂator ﬁlls the

airbag causing the bag to break out

of the cover and deploy. The inﬂator,

the airbag, and related hardware are

all part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are located

inside the steering wheel and

instrument panel. For vehicles with

seat-mounted side impact airbags,

there are airbag modules in the side

of the front seatbacks closest to the

door. For vehicles with roof-rail

airbags, there are airbag modules in

the ceiling of the vehicle, near the

side windows that have occupant

seating positions.

How Does an Airbag

Restrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or

near frontal collisions, even belted

occupants can contact the steering

wheel or the instrument panel. In

moderate to severe side collisions,

even belted occupants can contact

the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection

provided by safety belts. Frontal

airbags distribute the force of the

impact more evenly over the

occupant’s upper body, stopping

the occupant more gradually.

Seat-mounted side impact and

roof-rail airbags distribute the force

of the impact more evenly over the

occupant’s upper body.

But airbags would not help in many

types of collisions, primarily because

the occupant’s motion is not toward

those airbags. See When Should

an Airbag Inﬂate? on page 1-27

for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded

as anything more than a supplement

to safety belts.

1-28 Seats and Restraints

What Will You See After

an Airbag Inﬂates?

After the frontal airbags and

seat-mounted side impact airbags

inﬂate, they quickly deﬂate, so

quickly that some people may not

even realize an airbag inﬂated.

Roof-rail airbags may still be at least

partially inﬂated for some time after

they deploy. Some components of

the airbag module may be hot for

several minutes. For location of the

airbag modules, see What Makes

an Airbag Inﬂate? on page 1-28.

The parts of the airbag that come

into contact with you may be warm,

but not too hot to touch. There may

be some smoke and dust coming

from the vents in the deﬂated

airbags. Airbag inﬂation does not

prevent the driver from seeing out

of the windshield or being able to

steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent

people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION

When an airbag inﬂates, there

may be dust in the air. This dust

could cause breathing problems

for people with a history of

asthma or other breathing

trouble. To avoid this, everyone

in the vehicle should get out as

soon as it is safe to do so. If you

have breathing problems but

cannot get out of the vehicle

after an airbag inﬂates, then get

fresh air by opening a window

or a door. If you experience

breathing problems following an

airbag deployment, you should

seek medical attention.

In many crashes severe enough

to inﬂate the airbag, windshields

are broken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage

may also occur from the right

front passenger airbag.

•Airbags are designed to inﬂate

only once. After an airbag inﬂates,

you will need some new parts for

the airbag system. If you do not

get them, the airbag system will

not be there to help protect you

in another crash. A new system

will include airbag modules and

possibly other parts. The service

manual for your vehicle covers

the need to replace other parts.

•The vehicle has a crash sensing

and diagnostic module which

records information after a crash.

See Vehicle Data Recording and

Privacy on page 11-15 and Event

Data Recorders on page 11-16.

•Let only qualiﬁed technicians work

on the airbag systems. Improper

service can mean that an airbag

system will not work properly.

See your dealer/retailer for

service.

Seats and Restraints 1-29

Passenger Sensing

System

The vehicle has a passenger

sensing system for the right front

passenger position. The passenger

airbag status indicator will be visible

in the rearview mirror when you start

the vehicle. The words ON and OFF, or the

symbol for on and off, will be visible

during the system check. When the

system check is complete, either the

word ON or the word OFF, or the

symbol for on or the symbol for off,

will be visible. See Passenger Airbag

Status Indicator on page 4-15.

The passenger sensing system will

turn off the right front passenger’s

frontal airbag and seat-mounted

side impact airbag under certain

conditions. The driver’s airbags

are not part of the passenger

sensing system.

The passenger sensing system

works with sensors that are part

of the right front passenger’s seat.

The sensors are designed to detect

the presence of a properly-seated

occupant and determine if the right

front passenger’s frontal airbag and

seat-mounted side impact airbag

should be enabled (may inﬂate)

or not.

Accident statistics show that

children are safer if they are

restrained in the rear rather than

the front seat.

We recommend that children be

secured in a rear seat, including: an

infant or a child riding in a rear-facing

child restraint; a child riding in a

forward-facing child seat; an older

child riding in a booster seat; and

children, who are large enough,

using safety belts.

United States

Canada

1-30 Seats and Restraints

A label on the sun visor says,

“Never put a rear-facing child seat

in the front.” This is because the risk

to the rear-facing child is so great,

if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing child

restraint can be seriously

injured or killed if the right

front passenger airbag inﬂates.

This is because the back of

the rear-facing child restraint

would be very close to the

inﬂating airbag. A child in a

forward-facing child restraint

can be seriously injured or

killed if the right front passenger

airbag inﬂates and the

passenger seat is in a forward

position.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensing

system has turned off the right

front passenger frontal airbag

and seat-mounted side impact

airbag (if equipped), no system

is fail-safe. No one can

guarantee that an airbag will

not deploy under some unusual

circumstance, even though the

airbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child

restraints in a rear seat, even

if the airbag(s) are off. If you

secure a forward-facing child

restraint in the right front

seat, always move the front

passenger seat as far back as

it will go. It is better to secure

the child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is

designed to turn off the right front

passenger’s frontal airbag and

seat-mounted side impact airbag if:

•The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.

•The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facing

infant seat.

•The system determines that a

small child is present in a child

restraint.

•The system determines that

a small child is present in a

booster seat.

•A right front passenger takes

his/her weight off of the seat for

a period of time.

•The right front passenger seat is

occupied by a smaller person,

such as a child who has outgrown

child restraints.

•Or, if there is a critical problem

with the airbag system or the

passenger sensing system.

Seats and Restraints 1-31

When the passenger sensing

system has turned off the right

front passenger’s frontal airbag and

seat-mounted side impact airbag,

the off indicator will light and stay lit

to remind you that the airbags are

off. See Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator on page 4-15.

If a child restraint has been installed

and the on indicator is lit, turn

the vehicle off. Remove the child

restraint from the vehicle and

reinstall the child restraint following

the child restraint manufacturer’s

directions and refer to Securing

Child Restraints (Rear Seat) on

page 1-50 or Securing Child

Restraints (Right Front Seat)

on page 1-53.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint

and restarting the vehicle, the on

indicator is still lit, check to make

sure that the vehicle’s seatback is

not pressing the child restraint into

the seat cushion. If this happens,

slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback

and adjust the seat cushion if

possible. Also make sure the child

restraint is not trapped under

the vehicle head restraint. If this

happens, adjust the head restraint.

See Head Restraints on page 1-5.

Remove any additional material from

the seat such as blankets, cushions,

seat covers, seat heaters, or seat

massagers before reinstalling or

securing the child restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure

the child in the child restraint in

a rear seat position in the vehicle,

and check with your dealer/retailer.

The passenger sensing system is

designed to enable (may inﬂate)

the right front passenger’s frontal

airbag and seat-mounted side impact

airbag anytime the system senses

that a person of adult size is sitting

properly in the right front passenger’s

seat. When the passenger sensing

system has allowed the airbags to

be enabled, the on indicator will light

and stay lit to remind you that the

airbags are active.

For some children who have

outgrown child restraints and for

very small adults, the passenger

sensing system may or may not turn

off the right front passenger’s frontal

airbag and seat-mounted side impact

airbag, depending upon the person’s

seating posture and body build.

Everyone in the vehicle who has

outgrown child restraints should wear

a safety belt properly —whether or

not there is an airbag for that person.

1-32 Seats and Restraints

If a person of adult-size is sitting

in the right front passenger’s seat,

but the off indicator is lit, it could be

because that person is not sitting

properly in the seat. If this happens,

turn the vehicle off, remove any

additional material from the seat,

such as blankets, cushions, seat

covers, seat heaters or seat

massagers and ask the person

to place the seatback in the fully

upright position, then sit upright

in the seat, centered on the seat

cushion, with the person’s legs

comfortably extended. Restart the

vehicle and have the person remain

in this position for two to three

minutes. This will allow the system

to detect that person and then enable

the right front passenger’s frontal

airbag and seat-mounted side

impact airbag.

Safety belts help keep the

passenger in position on the

seat during vehicle maneuvers

and braking, which helps the

passenger sensing system maintain

the passenger airbag status.

See “Safety Belts” and “Child

Restraints” in the Index for

additional information about

the importance of proper

restraint use.

{CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light in

the instrument panel cluster

ever comes on and stays on, it

means that something may be

wrong with the airbag system.

If this ever happens, have the

vehicle serviced promptly,

because an adult-size person

sitting in the right front

passenger’s seat may not have

the protection of the airbag(s).

See Airbag Readiness Light

on page 4-14 for more on this,

including important safety

information.

A thick layer of additional material,

such as a blanket or cushion, or

aftermarket equipment such as

seat covers, seat heaters, and seat

massagers can affect how well the

passenger sensing system operates.

Seats and Restraints 1-33

We recommend that you not use

seat covers or other aftermarket

equipment other than any that GM

has approved for your speciﬁc

vehicle. See Adding Equipment to

Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on

page 1-35 for more information about

modiﬁcations that can affect how the

system operates.

The passenger sensing system may

suppress the airbag deployment

when liquid soaks into the seat.

If this happens, the off indicator

in the passenger airbag status

indicator and the airbag readiness

light on the instrument panel will

be lit. The system should resume

normal operation after the seat is

allowed to dry. If the system operates

incorrectly after the seat has dried,

have your dealer/retailer check the

system.

{CAUTION

Stowing of articles under the

passenger seat or between the

passenger seat cushion and

seatback may interfere with

the proper operation of the

passenger sensing system.

Servicing Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Airbags affect how your vehicle

should be serviced. There are

parts of the airbag system in

several places around your vehicle.

Your dealer/retailer and the service

manual have information about

servicing your vehicle and the airbag

system. To purchase a service

manual, see Service Publications

Ordering Information on page 11-14.

{CAUTION

For up to 10 seconds after the

ignition is turned off and the

battery is disconnected, an

airbag can still inﬂate during

improper service. You can be

injured if you are close to an

airbag when it inﬂates. Avoid

yellow connectors. They are

probably part of the airbag

system. Be sure to follow

proper service procedures,

and make sure the person

performing work for you is

qualiﬁed to do so.

1-34 Seats and Restraints

Adding Equipment to

Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehicle

that could keep the airbags

from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that

change the vehicle’s frame,

bumper system, height, front end

or side sheet metal, they may

keep the airbag system from

working properly. Changing or

moving any parts of the front

seats, safety belts, the airbag

sensing and diagnostic module,

steering wheel, instrument

panel, roof-rail airbag modules,

ceiling headliner or pillar

garnish trim, front sensors,

or airbag wiring can affect the

operation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has a

passenger sensing system for the

right front passenger position,

which includes sensors that are

part of the passenger’s seat.

The passenger sensing system

may not operate properly if the

original seat trim is replaced

with non-GM covers, upholstery

or trim, or with GM covers,

upholstery or trim designed for a

different vehicle. Any object, such

as an aftermarket seat heater or a

comfort enhancing pad or device,

installed under or on top of the

seat fabric, could also interfere

with the operation of the

passenger sensing system.

This could either prevent proper

deployment of the passenger

airbag(s) or prevent the

passenger sensing system

from properly turning off the

passenger airbag(s). See

Passenger Sensing System

on page 1-30.

If you have any questions about

this, you should contact Customer

Assistance before you modify

your vehicle. The phone numbers

and addresses for Customer

Assistance are in Step Two of the

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

in this manual. See Customer

Satisfaction Procedure on

page 11-1.

Q: Because I have a disability,

I have to get my vehicle

modiﬁed. How can I ﬁnd out

whether this will affect my

airbag system?

A: If you have questions,

call Customer Assistance.

The phone numbers and

addresses for Customer

Assistance are in Step Two

of the Customer Satisfaction

Procedure in this manual.

See Customer Satisfaction

Procedure on page 11-1.

In addition, your dealer/retailer and

the service manual have information

about the location of the airbag

sensors, sensing and diagnostic

module and airbag wiring.

Seats and Restraints 1-35

Airbag System Check

The airbag system does not need

regularly scheduled maintenance

or replacement. Make sure the

airbag readiness light is working.

See Airbag Readiness Light

on page 4-14 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering is

damaged, opened, or broken, the

airbag may not work properly.

Do not open or break the airbag

coverings. If there are any opened

or broken airbag covers, have

the airbag covering and/or airbag

module replaced. For the location

of the airbag modules, see What

Makes an Airbag Inﬂate? on

page 1-28. See your dealer/retailer

for service.

Replacing Airbag System

Parts After a Crash

{CAUTION

A crash can damage the

airbag systems in your vehicle.

A damaged airbag system

may not work properly and

may not protect you and your

passenger(s) in a crash,

resulting in serious injury or

even death. To help make

sure your airbag systems are

working properly after a crash,

have them inspected and any

necessary replacements made

as soon as possible.

If an airbag inﬂates, you will need

to replace airbag system parts.

See your dealer/retailer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays

on after the vehicle is started

or comes on when you are driving,

the airbag system may not work

properly. Have the vehicle serviced

right away. See Airbag Readiness

Light on page 4-14 for more

information.

1-36 Seats and Restraints

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown

booster seats should wear the

vehicle’s safety belts.

The manufacturer’s instructions that

come with the booster seat, state the

weight and height limitations for that

booster. Use a booster seat with a

lap-shoulder belt until the child

passes the below ﬁt test:

•Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seat

edge? If yes, continue. If no,

return to the booster seat.

•Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.

Does the shoulder belt rest on the

shoulder? If yes, continue. If no,

then return to the booster seat.

•Does the lap belt ﬁt low and snug

on the hips, touching the thighs?

If yes, continue. If no, return to the

booster seat.

•Can proper safety belt ﬁt be

maintained for the length of the

trip? If yes, continue. If no, return

to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way to

wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a

lap-shoulder belt and get the

additional restraint a shoulder belt

can provide. The shoulder belt

should not cross the face or neck.

The lap belt should ﬁt snugly

below the hips, just touching the

top of the thighs. This applies belt

force to the child’s pelvic bones in

a crash. It should never be worn

over the abdomen, which could

cause severe or even fatal

internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when

properly restrained in a child restraint

system or infant restraint system

secured in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are not

buckled up can strike other people

who are buckled up, or can be

thrown out of the vehicle. Older

children need to use safety belts

properly.

Seats and Restraints 1-37

{CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow two children to

wear the same safety belt.

The safety belt can not properly

spread the impact forces. In a

crash, the two children can be

crushed together and seriously

injured. A safety belt must be

used by only one person at

a time.

{CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear the

safety belt with the shoulder belt

behind their back. A child can be

seriously injured by not wearing

the lap-shoulder belt properly.

In a crash, the child would not

be restrained by the shoulder

belt. The child could move too

far forward increasing the

chance of head and neck injury.

The child might also slide under

the lap belt. The belt force would

then be applied right on the

abdomen. That could cause

serious or fatal injuries. The

shoulder belt should go over the

shoulder and across the chest.

Infants and Young

Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs

protection! This includes infants

and all other children. Neither the

distance traveled nor the age and

size of the traveler changes the

need, for everyone, to use safety

restraints. In fact, the law in every

state in the United States and in

every Canadian province says

children up to some age must be

restrained while in a vehicle.

1-38 Seats and Restraints

{CAUTION

Children can be seriously

injured or strangled if a

shoulder belt is wrapped around

their neck and the safety belt

continues to tighten. Never

leave children unattended in a

vehicle and never allow children

to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young

children ride in vehicles, they should

have the protection provided by

appropriate restraints. Children who

are not restrained properly can strike

other people, or can be thrown out

of the vehicle. In addition, young

children should not use the vehicle’s

adult safety belts alone; they need

to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a child

while riding in a vehicle. Due to

crash forces, an infant or a child

will become so heavy it is not

possible to hold it during a

crash. For example, in a crash at

only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb

(5.5 kg) infant will suddenly

become a 240 lb (110 kg) force

on a person’s arms. An infant

should be secured in an

appropriate restraint.

Seats and Restraints 1-39

{CAUTION

Never do this.

Children who are up against, or

very close to, any airbag when it

inﬂates can be seriously injured

or killed. Never put a rear-facing

child restraint in the right front

seat. Secure a rear-facing child

restraint in a rear seat. It is also

better to secure a forward-facing

child restraint in a rear seat.

If you must secure a

forward-facing child restraint

in the right front seat, always

move the front passenger

seat as far back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types of

add-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which

are purchased by the vehicle’s

owner, are available in four basic

types. Selection of a particular

restraint should take into

consideration not only the child’s

weight, height, and age but also

whether or not the restraint will be

compatible with the motor vehicle

in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child

restraints, there are many

different models available.

When purchasing a child

restraint, be sure it is designed

to be used in a motor vehicle.

If it is, the restraint will have a

label saying that it meets federal

motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s

instructions that come with the

restraint state the weight and

height limitations for a particular

child restraint. In addition, there

are many kinds of restraints

available for children with

special needs.

1-40 Seats and Restraints

{CAUTION

To reduce the risk of neck and

head injury during a crash,

infants need complete support.

This is because an infant’s neck

is not fully developed and its

head weighs so much compared

with the rest of its body. In a

crash, an infant in a rear-facing

child restraint settles into the

restraint, so the crash forces

can be distributed across the

strongest part of an infant’s

body, the back and shoulders.

Infants should always be

secured in rear-facing child

restraints.

{CAUTION

A young child’s hip bones are

still so small that the vehicle’s

regular safety belt may not

remain low on the hip bones,

as it should. Instead, it may

settle up around the child’s

abdomen. In a crash, the belt

would apply force on a body

area that is unprotected by

any bony structure. This alone

could cause serious or fatal

injuries. To reduce the risk

of serious or fatal injuries

during a crash, young children

should always be secured in

appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides

restraint with the seating surface

against the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infant

in place and, in a crash, acts to keep

the infant positioned in the restraint.

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat

Seats and Restraints 1-41

A forward-facing child seat (B)

provides restraint for the child’s body

with the harness.

A booster seat (C) is a child

restraint designed to improve the ﬁt

of the vehicle’s safety belt system.

A booster seat can also help a child

to see out the window.

Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle

{CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a crash if the child

restraint is not properly secured

in the vehicle. Secure the child

restraint properly in the vehicle

using the vehicle’s safety belt or

LATCH system, following the

instructions that came with

that child restraint and the

instructions in this manual.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats

1-42 Seats and Restraints

To help reduce the chance of injury,

the child restraint must be secured in

the vehicle. Child restraint systems

must be secured in vehicle seats by

lap belts or the lap belt portion of a

lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH

system. See Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children (LATCH) on

page 1-45 for more information.

A child can be endangered in a

crash if the child restraint is not

properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child

restraint, refer to the instructions that

come with the restraint which may be

on the restraint itself or in a booklet,

or both, and to this manual. The child

restraint instructions are important,

so if they are not available, obtain

a replacement copy from the

manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured

child restraint can move around in a

collision or sudden stop and injure

people in the vehicle. Be sure to

properly secure any child restraint

in the vehicle — even when no child

is in it.

Securing the Child Within the

Child Restraint

{CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a crash if the child

is not properly secured in the

child restraint. Secure the

child properly following the

instructions that came with

that child restraint.

Where to Put the

Restraint

According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when

properly restrained in a child restraint

system or infant restraint system

secured in a rear seating position.

We recommend that children and

child restraints be secured in a rear

seat, including: an infant or a child

riding in a rear-facing child restraint;

a child riding in a forward-facing child

seat; an older child riding in a booster

seat; and children, who are large

enough, using safety belts.

Seats and Restraints 1-43

A label on the sun visor says,

“Never put a rear-facing child seat

in the front.” This is because the risk

to the rear-facing child is so great,

if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing child

restraint can be seriously

injured or killed if the right

front passenger airbag inﬂates.

This is because the back of

the rear-facing child restraint

would be very close to the

inﬂating airbag. A child in a

forward-facing child restraint

can be seriously injured or

killed if the right front passenger

airbag inﬂates and the

passenger seat is in a forward

position.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensing

system has turned off the right

front passenger frontal airbag,

no system is fail-safe. No one

can guarantee that an airbag

will not deploy under some

unusual circumstance, even

though it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child

restraints in a rear seat, even

if the airbag is off. If you secure

a forward-facing child restraint

in the right front seat, always

move the front passenger seat

as far back as it will go. It is

better to secure the child

restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System

on page 1-30 for additional

information.

When securing a child restraint in

a rear seating position, study the

instructions that came with the child

restraint to make sure it is compatible

with this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint is

installed, be sure to secure the

child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured

child restraint can move around in a

collision or sudden stop and injure

people in the vehicle. Be sure to

properly secure any child restraint

in the vehicle — even when no child

is in it.

1-44 Seats and Restraints

Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children

(LATCH)

The LATCH system holds a child

restraint during driving or in a crash.

This system is designed to make

installation of a child restraint easier.

The LATCH system uses anchors

in the vehicle and attachments

on the child restraint that are made

for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible

child restraint is properly installed

using the anchors, or use the

vehicle’s safety belts to secure the

restraint, following the instructions

that came with that restraint, and

also the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint with

a top tether, you must also use either

the lower anchors or the safety belts

to properly secure the child restraint.

A child restraint must never be

installed using only the top tether

and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system

in your vehicle, you need a child

restraint that has LATCH

attachments. The child restraint

manufacturer will provide you with

instructions on how to use the child

restraint and its attachments. The

following explains how to attach a

child restraint with these attachments

in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions

or child restraints have lower

anchors and attachments or top

tether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal

bars built into the vehicle. There

are two lower anchors for each

LATCH seating position that will

accommodate a child restraint with

lower attachments (B).

Seats and Restraints 1-45

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top

of the child restraint to the vehicle.

A top tether anchor is built into

the vehicle. The top tether

attachment (B) on the child restraint

connects to the top tether anchor

in the vehicle in order to reduce

the forward movement and rotation

of the child restraint during driving

or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have

a single tether (A) or a dual

tether (C). Either will have a single

attachment (B) to secure the top

tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with top

tethers are designed for use with or

without the top tether being attached.

Others require the top tether always

to be attached. In Canada, the law

requires that forward-facing child

restraints have a top tether, and that

the tether be attached. Be sure to

read and follow the instructions for

your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have

a top tether, one can be obtained, in

kit form, for many child restraints.

Ask the child restraint manufacturer

whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations

i(Top Tether Anchor): Seating

positions with top tether anchors.

j(Lower Anchor): Seating positions

with two lower anchors.

Rear Seat

1-46 Seats and Restraints

To assist you in locating the lower

anchors, each seating position

with lower anchors has two labels,

near the crease between the

seatback and the seat cushion.

If the top tether anchors are

covered, the top tether anchor

symbol will be located on the cover

to assist you in locating them.

The top tether anchors are located

on the seatback for each rear seating

position. Be sure to use an anchor

located on the same side of the

vehicle as the seating position where

the child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in a

position without a top tether anchor if

a national or local law requires that

the top tether be attached, or if the

instructions that come with the child

restraint say that the top tether must

be attached. There is no place to

attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that

children are safer if they are

restrained in the rear rather than

the front seat. See Where to Put

the Restraint on page 1-43 for

additional information.

Seats and Restraints 1-47

Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH

System

{CAUTION

If a LATCH-type child restraint

is not attached to anchors, the

child restraint will not be able

to protect the child correctly.

In a crash, the child could be

seriously injured or killed. Install

a LATCH-type child restraint

properly using the anchors, or

use the vehicle’s safety belts to

secure the restraint, following

the instructions that came with

the child restraint and the

instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION

Do not attach more than

one child restraint to a single

anchor. Attaching more than

one child restraint to a single

anchor could cause the anchor

or attachment to come loose

or even break during a crash.

A child or others could be

injured. To reduce the risk of

serious or fatal injuries during

a crash, attach only one child

restraint per anchor.

{CAUTION

Children can be seriously

injured or strangled if a

shoulder belt is wrapped

around their neck and the

safety belt continues to tighten.

Buckle any unused safety belts

behind the child restraint so

children cannot reach them.

Pull the shoulder belt all the

way out of the retractor to set

the lock, if your vehicle has

one, after the child restraint

has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCH

attachments rub against the

vehicle’s safety belts. This may

damage these parts. If necessary,

move buckled safety belts to avoid

rubbing the LATCH attachments.

1-48 Seats and Restraints

Do not fold the empty rear seat

with a safety belt buckled. This

could damage the safety belt or

the seat. Unbuckle and return the

safety belt to its stowed position.

1. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint does not have

lower attachments or the desired

seating position does not have

lower anchors, secure the child

restraint with the top tether and

the safety belts. Refer to your

child restraint manufacturer

instructions and the instructions

in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for

the desired seating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on

the seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the

lower attachments on the

child restraint to the lower

anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer

recommends that the top tether

be attached, attach and tighten

the top tether to the top tether

anchor, if equipped. Refer to the

child restraint instructions and

the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. If the anchor is covered,

open the cover to expose

the anchor.

2.3. Route, attach, and tighten

the top tether according

to your child restraint

instructions and the

following instructions:

If the position you are using

has an adjustable headrest

or head restraint and you are

using a dual tether, route the

tether around the headrest or

head restraint.

Seats and Restraints 1-49

If the position you are using

has an adjustable headrest

or head restraint and you

are using a single tether,

raise the headrest or head

restraint and route the tether

under the headrest or head

restraint and in between the

headrest or head restraint

posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint

in different directions to be sure

it is secure.

Replacing LATCH

System Parts After

a Crash

{CAUTION

A crash can damage the

LATCH system in the vehicle.

A damaged LATCH system may

not properly secure the child

restraint, resulting in serious

injury or even death in a crash.

To help make sure the LATCH

system is working properly

after a crash, see your dealer/

retailer to have the system

inspected and any necessary

replacements made as soon

as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH system

and it was being used during a crash,

new LATCH system parts may be

needed.

New parts and repairs may be

necessary even if the LATCH

system was not being used at

the time of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints

(Rear Seat)

When securing a child restraint in

a rear seating position, study the

instructions that came with your child

restraint to make sure it is compatible

with this vehicle.

If your child restraint has the LATCH

system, see Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children (LATCH) on

page 1-45 for how to install your child

restraint using LATCH. If you secure

a child restraint using a safety belt

and it uses a top tether, see Lower

Anchors and Tethers for Children

(LATCH) on page 1-45 for top tether

anchor locations.

1-50 Seats and Restraints

Do not secure a child restraint in a

position without a top tether anchor if

a national or local law requires that

the top tether be anchored, or if the

instructions that come with the child

restraint say that the top strap must

be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have

a top tether, and that the tether

be attached.

If your child restraint does not have

the LATCH system, you will be using

the safety belt to secure the child

restraint in this position. Be sure to

follow the instructions that came with

the child restraint. Secure the child in

the child restraint when and as the

instructions say.

If you need to install more than

one child restraint in the rear seat,

be sure to read Where to Put

the Restraint on page 1-43.

1. Put the child restraint on

the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run

the lap and shoulder portions of

the vehicle’s safety belt through

or around the restraint. The child

restraint instructions will show

you how. 3. Push the latch plate into the

buckle until it clicks.

Make sure the release button

is positioned so you would

be able to unbuckle the safety

belt quickly if necessary.

Seats and Restraints 1-51

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt

all the way out of the retractor to

set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down

on the child restraint, pull the

shoulder portion of the belt to

tighten the lap portion of the belt,

and feed the shoulder belt back

into the retractor. If you are using

a forward-facing child restraint,

you may ﬁnd it helpful to use your

knee to push down on the child

restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions

regarding the use of the top

tether. See Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children (LATCH) on

page 1-45 for more information.

7. Push and pull the child restraint

in different directions to be sure

it is secure.

To remove the child restraint,

unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt

and let it go back all the way.

If the top tether is attached to

a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

1-52 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints

(Right Front Seat)

Your vehicle has airbags. A rear

seat is a safer place to secure a

forward-facing child restraint.

See Where to Put the Restraint

on page 1-43.

In addition, your vehicle has a

passenger sensing system which

is designed to turn off the right

front passenger’s frontal and

seat-mounted side impact airbag

under certain conditions. See

Passenger Sensing System on

page 1-30 and Passenger Airbag

Status Indicator on page 4-15 for

more information on this, including

important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says,

“Never put a rear-facing child seat

in the front.” This is because the risk

to the rear-facing child is so great,

if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing child

restraint can be seriously

injured or killed if the right

front passenger airbag inﬂates.

This is because the back of

the rear-facing child restraint

would be very close to the

inﬂating airbag. A child in a

forward-facing child restraint

can be seriously injured or

killed if the right front passenger

airbag inﬂates and the

passenger seat is in a forward

position.

Even if the passenger sensing

system has turned off the right

front passenger frontal airbag,

no system is fail-safe. No one

can guarantee that an airbag will

not deploy under some unusual

circumstance, even though it is

turned off.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child

restraints in a rear seat, even if

the airbag is off. If you secure

a forward-facing child restraint

in the right front seat, always

move the front passenger seat

as far back as it will go. It is

better to secure the child

restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System

on page 1-30 for additional

information.

If your child restraint has the LATCH

system, see Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children (LATCH) on

page 1-45 for how to install your child

restraint using LATCH. If you secure

a child restraint using a safety belt

and it uses a top tether, see Lower

Anchors and Tethers for Children

(LATCH) on page 1-45 for top tether

anchor locations.

Seats and Restraints 1-53

Do not secure a child seat in a

position without a top tether anchor

if a national or local law requires

that the top tether be anchored,

or if the instructions that come with

the child restraint say that the

top strap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have

a top tether, and that the tether

be attached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder

belt to secure the child restraint in

this position. Follow the instructions

that came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as it

will go before securing the

forward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensing

system has turned off the right

front passenger’s frontal and

seat-mounted side impact airbag,

the off indicator on the passenger

airbag status indicator should

light and stay lit when you start

the vehicle. See Passenger

Airbag Status Indicator on

page 4-15.

2. Put the child restraint on

the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run

the lap and shoulder portions

of the vehicle’s safety belt

through or around the restraint.

The child restraint instructions

will show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into the

buckle until it clicks.

Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able

to unbuckle the safety belt quickly

if necessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt

all the way out of the retractor to

set the lock.

1-54 Seats and Restraints

6. To tighten the belt, push down

on the child restraint, pull the

shoulder portion of the belt to

tighten the lap portion of the belt

and feed the shoulder belt back

into the retractor. If you are using

a forward-facing child restraint,

you may ﬁnd it helpful to use your

knee to push down on the child

restraint as you tighten the belt.

7. Push and pull the child restraint

in different directions to be sure

it is secure.

If the airbags are off, the off

indicator in the passenger airbag

status indicator will come on

and stay on when the vehicle

is started.

If a child restraint has been

installed and the on indicator is lit,

turn the vehicle off. Remove the

child restraint from the vehicle and

reinstall the child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint

and restarting the vehicle, the on

indicator is still lit, check to make

sure that the vehicle’s seatback is

not pressing the child restraint into

the seat cushion. If this happens,

slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback

and adjust the seat cushion if

possible. Also make sure the child

restraint is not trapped under the

vehicle head restraint. If this

happens, adjust the head restraint.

Remove any additional material from

the seat such as blankets, cushions,

seat covers, seat heaters or seat

massagers before reinstalling or

securing the child restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure

the child in the child restraint in

a rear seat position in the vehicle

and check with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint,

unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt

and let it go back all the way.

Seats and Restraints 1-55

✍NOTES

1-56 Seats and Restraints

Keys, Doors and

Windows

Keys

Keys ...................................2-2

Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) System ..........2-3

Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) System

Operation ..........................2-4

Doors and Locks

Door Locks .........................2-5

Power Door Locks ..............2-5

Rear Door Security Locks ...2-6

Liftgate ...............................2-6

Theft-Deterrent Systems

Theft-Deterrent Systems .....2-7

Immobilizer .........................2-7

Immobilizer Operation .........2-8

Content Theft-Deterrent ......2-9

Windows

Windows ...........................2-10

Power Windows ................2-10

Sun Visors ........................2-11

Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ....2-12

Outside Mirror(s) ...............2-12

Outside Power Mirror(s) ....2-12

Sunroof

Sunroof .............................2-13

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys

{CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle

with the ignition key is

dangerous for many reasons,

children or others could be

badly injured or even killed.

They could operate the power

windows or other controls or

even make the vehicle move.

The windows will function with

the keys in the ignition and

children could be seriously

injured or killed if caught in

the path of a closing window.

Do not leave the keys in a

vehicle with children.

The key, located in the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, is

used for the ignition and all locks.

Press the button on the RKE

transmitter to extend the key.

Press the button and the key

blade to retract the key.

When a new vehicle is delivered,

a key number is included in

the vehicle documents.

Each key number tells your

dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed

locksmith how to make extra keys.

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keep this number in a safe place.

If you lose your keys, you will

be able to have one made easily

using this number. If you need

a new key, go to your dealer/retailer

for the correct key code.

Notice: If you ever lock your

keys in the vehicle, you may have

to damage the vehicle to get in.

Be sure you have spare keys.

If you are locked out of your vehicle,

contact Roadside Assistance or

OnStar. See Roadside Assistance

Program on page 11-5 or OnStar

System on page 4-38.

Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

system operates on a radio

frequency subject to Federal

Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause

interference.

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210

of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause

interference.

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modiﬁcations to this

system by other than an authorized

service facility could void

authorization to use this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKE

operating range, try this:

•Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far from

the vehicle. Stand closer

during rainy or snowy weather.

•Check the location. Other

vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal. Take a few

steps to the left or right, hold

the transmitter higher, and

try again.

•Check the transmitter’s battery.

See “Battery Replacement”

later in this section.

•If the transmitter is still not

working correctly, see your

dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed

technician for service.

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System Operation

c(Lock): Press to lock the doors,

liftgate and fuel tank door.

If the driver door is open, the doors

will not lock.

d(Unlock): Press to unlock the

doors, liftgate and fuel tank door.

Press and hold dto lower all

the windows.

Matching Transmitter(s) to

Your Vehicle

Each RKE transmitter is uniquely

coded to prevent another transmitter

from unlocking the vehicle. If a

transmitter is lost or stolen, a

replacement can be purchased

through your dealer/retailer. All

transmitters need to be re-coded to

match the new transmitter. The lost

transmitter will no longer work after

the new transmitters are re-coded.

The vehicle can have a maximum of

ﬁve transmitters coded to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the Remote

Control Battery check message

appears in the DIC. See “Remote

Control Battery Check” under DIC

Warnings and Messages (Base and

Uplevel Systems) on page 4-37.

Notice: When replacing the

battery, do not touch any of

the circuitry on the transmitter.

Static from your body could

damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Extend the key. See Keys

on page 2-2 for additional

information.

2. Open the RKE transmitter.

3. Remove the old battery. Do not

use a metal object.

4. Insert the new battery, positive

side facing up. Replace with a

CR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Close the RKE transmitter.

Synchronization

After changing the battery, turn the

ignition to ON/RUN. This will

synchronize the key.

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION

Unlocked doors can be

dangerous.

•Passengers, especially

children, can easily open the

doors and fall out of a

moving vehicle. When a door

is locked, the handle will not

open it. You increase the

chance of being thrown out

of the vehicle in a crash if

the doors are not locked. So,

wear safety belts properly

and lock the doors whenever

you drive.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

•Young children who get into

unlocked vehicles may be

unable to get out. A child can

be overcome by extreme heat

and can suffer permanent

injuries or even death from

heat stroke. Always lock your

vehicle whenever you leave it.

•Outsiders can easily enter

through an unlocked door

when you slow down or stop

your vehicle. Locking your

doors can help prevent this

from happening.

To manually lock or unlock your

vehicle, use the key in the driver’s

door from the outside to unlock

it. When the driver door is opened

the entire vehicle is unlocked. There

are also window sill knobs that

unlock each door from the inside.

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switch is

located on the instrument panel.

T(Door Lock): Press to lock

or unlock the doors, liftgate, and the

fuel tank door.

If the driver’s door is not closed

properly, the power door lock switch

will not lock the doors.

When the vehicle has been

unlocked, the key is not in the

ignition, and no door is opened the

vehicle will automatically lock

itself again after one minute.

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

Rear Door Security

Locks

Your vehicle has rear door security

locks to prevent passengers from

opening the rear doors from the

inside.

Open the rear doors to access the

security locks on the inside edge

of each door.

To set the locks, insert a key into

the slot and turn it to the horizontal

position. The door can only be

opened from the outside with the

door unlocked. To return the door to

normal operation, turn the slot to

the vertical position.

Liftgate

{CAUTION

It can be dangerous to drive

with the liftgate open because

carbon monoxide (CO) gas can

come into your vehicle. You

cannot see or smell CO. It can

cause unconsciousness and

even death.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If you must drive with the liftgate

open, or if electrical wiring or

other cable connections must

pass through the seal between

the body and the liftgate:

•Make sure all other windows

are shut.

•Turn the fan on your heating

or cooling system to its

highest speed with the

recirculation mode off. That

will force outside air into your

vehicle. See Climate Control

System in the index.

•If you have air outlets on or

under the instrument panel,

open them all the way.

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Notice: If you open the liftgate

without checking for overhead

obstructions such as a garage

door, you could damage the

liftgate or the liftgate glass.

Always check to make sure the

area above and behind the liftgate

is clear before opening it.

Press the touchpad located in the

handle of the liftgate and lift up

to open.

Use the inside pull handle to lower

and close the liftgate.

Do not press the touchpad while

closing the liftgate. This will

cause the liftgate to be unlatched.

Always close the liftgate before

driving.

Theft-Deterrent

Systems

Vehicle theft is big business,

especially in some cities. This

vehicle has theft-deterrent features,

however, they do not make it

impossible to steal.

Immobilizer

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause

interference.

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

This device complies with RSS-210

of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause

interference.

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause

undesired operation of the

device.

Changes or modiﬁcations to this

system by other than an authorized

service facility could void

authorization to use this equipment.

Immobilizer Operation

This vehicle has a passive

theft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armed

when the key is removed from

the ignition.

The system is automatically

disarmed when the key is turned to

ON/RUN.

You do not have to manually arm or

disarm the system.

The service vehicle soon light,

located in the instrument panel

cluster, comes on if there is

a problem with arming or disarming

the theft-deterrent system.

The key uses a transponder that

matches an immobilizer control unit

in the vehicle. Only the correct

key starts the vehicle.

When starting the vehicle, the

service vehicle soon light comes on

brieﬂy when the ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and the

service vehicle soon light ﬂashes

there is a problem with the system.

Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start and

the service vehicle soon light

continues to ﬂash, try another key.

If the engine still does not start

with the other key, the vehicle needs

service. If the vehicle does start,

the ﬁrst key may be damaged.

See your dealer/retailer who can

service the theft-deterrent system

and have a new key made.

In an emergency, contact Roadside

Service. See Roadside Assistance

Program on page 11-5.

Do not leave the key or device that

disarms or deactivates the theft

deterrent system in the vehicle.

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Content Theft-Deterrent

This vehicle has a content

theft-deterrent alarm system.

The security light is located on the

instrument panel.

Do not use this system if there are

people in the vehicle. The doors

can not be unlocked from inside the

vehicle.

Arming the System

To arm the system:

1. Close all doors, windows, hood

and sunroof.

2. Press con the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter.

The security light ﬂashes when the

vehicle is armed.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of the

following:

•Press don the RKE transmitter.

•Turn the ignition on.

The security light stays on for

approximately one second when the

vehicle is disarming.

How the System Alarm is

Activated

To activate the system if it is armed,

open any door, the liftgate or

hood. The horn will sound and the

hazard warning ﬂashers will ﬂash.

How to Turn Off the System

Alarm

To turn off the system alarm, do

one of the following:

•Press the unlock button on the

RKE transmitter.

•Insert the key in the ignition and

turn it on.

The theft-deterrent system is

disarmed when the alarm is

turned off.

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Windows

{CAUTION

Leaving children, helpless

adults, or pets in a vehicle

with the windows closed is

dangerous. They can be

overcome by the extreme heat

and suffer permanent injuries

or even death from heat stroke.

Never leave a child, a helpless

adult, or a pet alone in a

vehicle, especially with the

windows closed in warm or hot

weather.

Power Windows

{CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle

with the keys is dangerous for

many reasons, children or

others could be badly injured

or even killed. They could

operate the power windows or

other controls or even make the

vehicle move. The windows will

function and they could be

seriously injured or killed if

caught in the path of a closing

window. Do not leave keys in a

vehicle with children.

When there are children in

the rear seat use the window

lockout button to prevent

unintentional operation of

the windows.

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

The window switches are located on

each of the doors.

To lower a window, press the switch

down. To raise a window, pull the

switch up.

Express-Down Window

This feature is on all windows.

It allows you to lower the window

all the way without holding the

switch down.

Press the front of the switch to

the second position and release.

If you want to stop the window as

it is lowering, brieﬂy pull up the

switch.

Press and hold the unlock button on

the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter to lower all of the

windows from outside the vehicle.

Window Lockout

o(Window Lockout): This button

is located on the driver’s door

armrest. Slide the switch forward to

turn the lockout feature on. The

rear windows can only be opened or

closed by the driver window

switches. The light on the button

indicates the feature is in use. Press

again to turn off.

Sun Visors

Pull the visor toward you, or move it

to the side to help reduce glare.

To use the lighted mirror, lift

the cover.

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror

Hold the mirror in the center to move

it for a clearer view of behind your

vehicle.

Headlamp Glare

To reduce headlamp glare from

vehicles following from behind, pull

the lever toward you. Push the

lever forward after the vehicle glare

is gone, to return the mirror back

to the original position.

Vehicles with OnStar

have three

OnStar

control buttons located at

the bottom of the mirror. See your

dealer/retailer for more information

on the system and how to subscribe

to OnStar

. See OnStar

System on

page 4-38.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directly

on the mirror. Use a soft towel

dampened with glass cleaner.

Outside Mirror(s)

To maximize the viewing area,

adjust each mirror to see the side of

your vehicle and the area beside

and behind your vehicle.

Manually fold the mirrors ﬂat against

the side of the vehicle by pushing

them toward the vehicle’s doors.

Outside Power Mirror(s)

hi(Power Mirrors): Press to

select the driver side or passenger

side mirror. Press the arrows to

move the selected mirror in

the desired direction.

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Outside Heated Mirrors

The vehicle may have outside

heated mirrors which help clear the

condensation, snow, and ice.

<(Rear Window Defogger):

Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear

Window Defogger” under, Climate

Control System on page 7-1 for

more information.

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, the

switches are located in the overhead

console. To operate the sunroof,

the ignition must be turned on.

tVent/Open: With the sunroof in

the closed position, press to vent

the sunroof. With the sunroof in the

vent position, press to open the

sunroof. The sunshade will

open automatically with the sunroof.

uClose: Press to close the

sunroof. Press and hold to close

completely.

Sunshade

rSunshade Open: Press to

open the sunshade.

sSunshade Close: Press to

close the sunshade, and press

and hold to close the sunshade

completely.

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

✍NOTES

2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

Storage

Glove Box ..........................3-1

Cupholders .........................3-1

Cargo Cover .......................3-1

Cargo Tie Downs ...............3-1

Storage

Glove Box

Pull up on the handle to open the

glovebox. There may be a shelf

inside that can be removed by lifting

up on the shelf and pulling it out.

Cupholders

There is a cupholder on the front

edge of the rear seat cushion.

To open or close, press on the

cupholder.

There is a cupholder on the rear

center console.

Cargo Cover

Your vehicle may have a cargo

cover.

To remove the cover, unhook the

retaining straps from the liftgate and

pull the cover from the side guides.

Cargo Tie Downs

There are four cargo tie-downs

located in the rear compartment of

the vehicle, that can be used to

secure small loads.

Storage 3-1

✍NOTES

3-2 Storage

Instruments and

Controls

Instrument Panel

Overview

Instrument Panel

Overview ...........................4-2

Hazard Warning Flashers ...4-4

Horn ...................................4-4

Tilt Wheel ...........................4-4

Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever ................................4-4

Cruise Control ....................4-5

Turn and Lane-Change

Signals .............................4-8

Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changer ............................4-8

Flash-to-Pass ......................4-8

Windshield Wipers ..............4-9

Windshield Washer ...........4-10

Rear Window Wiper/

Washer ...........................4-10

Accessory Power

Outlet(s) ..........................4-10

Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators

Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators .................4-11

Instrument Panel Cluster ...4-12

Speedometer and

Odometer ........................4-13

Trip Odometer(s) ...............4-13

Tachometer .......................4-13

Safety Belt Reminders ......4-14

Airbag Readiness Light .....4-14

Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator ..........................4-15

Charging System Light ......4-17

Brake System Warning

Light ................................4-17

Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light .......4-18

StabiliTrak

Indicator

Light ................................4-19

Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning

Light ................................4-19

Tire Pressure Light ...........4-19

Malfunction

Indicator Lamp ................4-20

Oil Pressure Light .............4-22

Low Oil Level Light ...........4-23

Winter Driving Mode

Light ................................4-23

Fog Lamp Light ................4-23

Exterior Lamps Off

Reminder ........................4-24

Cruise Control Light ..........4-24

Highbeam On Light ...........4-24

Door Ajar Light .................4-24

Service Vehicle Soon

Light ................................4-24

Fuel Gage ........................4-25

Low Fuel Warning Light ....4-25

Driver Information

Center (DIC)

Driver Information

Center (DIC) ...................4-26

DIC Operation and

Displays (Base Level

DIC and Audio) ...............4-27

DIC Operation and

Displays (Uplevel

DIC and Audio) ...............4-31

DIC Warnings and

Messages (Base and

Uplevel Systems) ............4-37

OnStar

System

OnStar

System ................4-38

Instruments and Controls 4-1

Instrument Panel Overview

4-2 Instruments and Controls

The main components of the

instrument panel are the:

A. Exterior Lamps Controls on

page 5-1.

B. Outlets. Outlet Adjustment on

page 7-4.

C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

on page 4-4.

D. DIC Operation and Displays

(Base Level DIC and Audio)

on page 4-27 or DIC Operation

and Displays (Uplevel DIC

and Audio) on page 4-31 and

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

on page 6-24. (If Equipped)

E. Instrument Panel Cluster on

page 4-12.

F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls

on page 6-24. (If Equipped)

G. Windshield Wipers on page 4-9.

H. Heated Seats on page 1-6.

(If Equipped)

I. StabiliTrak

System on

page 8-19. (If Equipped)

J. Driver Information Center (DIC)

on page 4-26. (If Equipped)

K. Hazard Warning Flashers on

page 4-4.

L. Power Door Locks on page 2-5.

M. Passenger Safety Belt

Reminder. Safety Belt

Reminders on page 4-14.

N. Front Passenger Airbag. Airbag

System on page 1-23.

O. Fog Lamps on page 5-2.

(If Equipped)

P. Instrument Panel Brightness on

page 5-3.

Q. Hood Release on page 9-5.

R. Tilt Wheel on page 4-4.

S. Horn on page 4-4.

T. Ignition Positions on page 8-2.

U. Climate Control System on

page 7-1.

V. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on

page 4-10. (Covered)

W. Audio System(s) on page 6-1.

X. Glove Box on page 3-1.

Instruments and Controls 4-3

Hazard Warning Flashers

|:Press this button located on

the instrument panel, to make the

front and rear turn signal lamps ﬂash

on and off. This warns others that

you are having trouble. Press the

button again to turn the ﬂashers off.

While the hazard warning ﬂashers

are on, the turn signals do not work.

An indicator light on the hazard

warning ﬂasher button comes on

whenever the ignition is turned on.

If the airbags are deployed, the

hazard warning ﬂashers turn

on automatically. Press the

button twice to turn them off.

Horn

Press the horn symbol in the middle

of the steering wheel to sound

the horn.

Tilt Wheel

A tilt and telescope wheel lets the

steering wheel position be adjusted.

The adjustment lever is located on

the left side of the steering column.

It allows the steering column to be

moved up or down and in or out.

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving.

Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever

The lever on the left side of the

steering column includes the

following:

G:Turn and Lane-Change

Signals.

2:Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changer.

J:Cruise Control (If Equipped).

Flash-to-Pass Feature.

Information for these features is on

the pages following.

4-4 Instruments and Controls

Cruise Control

{CAUTION

Cruise control can be

dangerous where you cannot

drive safely at a steady speed.

So, do not use your cruise

control on winding roads or

in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be

dangerous on slippery roads.

On such roads, fast changes

in tire traction can cause

excessive wheel slip, and you

could lose control. Do not use

cruise control on slippery

roads.

With cruise control, a speed of about

25 mph (40 km/h) or more can be

maintained without keeping your foot

on the accelerator. This can really

help on long trips. Cruise control

does not work at speeds below

about 25 mph (40 km/h).

The cruise control buttons

are located on the turn signal/

multifunction lever on the left

side of the steering wheel.

9(On/Off): Press and hold the

button on the back end of the cruise

control lever, to turn the cruise

control system on or off. The CC

on or CC off message will appear on

the instrument panel cluster at the

odometer display to show that the

cruise control system is on or off.

AJ(Set/Accelerate): Press

to set a speed and to accelerate

the speed.

BW(Resume/Coast): Press to

resume a set speed and to decrease

the speed.

Instruments and Controls 4-5

Setting Cruise Control

For safety reasons the cruise

control cannot be turned on until

the brake has been applied once.

With automatic transmission, only

use cruise control in DRIVE (D).

Press the On/Off button to turn on

the cruise control. A message brieﬂy

appears on the instrument panel

cluster at the odometer display

when the cruise control has been

turned on.

{CAUTION

If you leave your cruise control

on when you are not using

cruise, you might hit a button

and go into cruise when you

do not want to. You could be

startled and even lose control.

Keep the cruise control switch

off until you want to use cruise

control.

1. Press Jand the current speed

is stored and maintained.

2. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal. The Jindicator light on

the instrument panel cluster turns

on after the cruise control has

been set to the desired speed.

The cruise control automatically

disengages under the following

conditions:

•The vehicle speed drops below

25 mph (40 km/h).

•The brake is applied.

•The clutch pedal is applied

(for manual transmission

vehicles).

•The automatic transmission is in

NEUTRAL (N).

•The On/Off button is pressed.

CC On Message

CC Off Message

4-6 Instruments and Controls

Resuming a Set Speed

Once the vehicle speed reaches

about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more and

the cruise control is on, press W.

The vehicle returns to the previous

speed selected before the cruise

was disengaged.

The stored speed is deleted if the

ignition is turned off.

Increasing Speed While Using

Cruise Control

•Press and hold Juntil the

desired speed is reached,

then release it.

•To increase vehicle speed

in small increments, brieﬂy

press Jrepeatedly. Each

time this is done, the vehicle

speed increase by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) without using the

accelerator pedal.

When the Jbutton is released

the current speed is stored

and maintained.

Reducing Speed While Using

Cruise Control

•Press and hold Wuntil the

desired lower speed is reached,

then release it.

•To reduce vehicle speed in

small increments, brieﬂy

press Wrepeatedly. Each time

this is done, the vehicle speed

decreases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

When the Wbutton is released

the current speed is stored

and maintained.

Passing Another Vehicle

While Using Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to

increase the vehicle speed. When

the accelerator pedal is released,

the vehicle will return to the

previously set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will work

on hills depends upon the vehicle

speed, load, and the steepness of

the hills. While going up steep hills,

you might have to step on the

accelerator pedal to maintain the

vehicle’s speed. While going

downhill, you might have to brake

or shift to a lower gear to keep the

vehicle’s speed down. Of course,

applying the brake turns off the

cruise control.

Ending Cruise Control

There are several ways to end

cruise control:

•Step lightly on the brake or

clutch pedal.

•The automatic transmission is

placed in NEUTRAL (N).

•Press the 9button.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed

memory is erased when the cruise

control or the ignition is turned off.

Instruments and Controls 4-7

Turn and Lane-Change

Signals

The turn signal has two upward and

downward positions to signal a turn

or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all

the way up or down, past the detent.

The lever returns to its starting

position when released.

An arrow on the instrument panel

cluster ﬂashes in the direction of

the turn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or

lower the lever until the arrow starts

to ﬂash, and then release the lever.

Do not move the lever past the

detent. The turn signal will

automatically ﬂash three times

and turn off.

To cancel it before turning, move

the lever slightly in either direction.

Do not past the detent.

Headlamp High/

Low-Beam Changer

23(Headlamp High/Low

Beam Changer): To change the

headlamps from low to high beam,

push the multifunction lever towards

the instrument panel. To return to

low-beam headlamps, push the lever

towards the instrument panel again

or pull the lever toward you. Then

release it.

This indicator light on the instrument

panel cluster is on while the high

beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-Pass

Pull the turn signal/multifunction

lever towards you to ﬂash the high

beams from low beam.

4-8 Instruments and Controls

Windshield Wipers

Clear ice and snow from the wiper

blades before using them. If the

wiper blades are frozen to the

windshield, gently loosen or thaw

them. If the blades do become

damaged, install new blades or

blade inserts. See Windshield Wiper

Blade Replacement on page 9-21.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the

wiper motor. A circuit breaker will

stop the motor until it cools down.

Clear away snow or ice to prevent

an overload.

The lever on the right side of the

steering column operates the

windshield wipers. Push up or pull

down on the lever to place it in

one of the following positions.

[(High): For rapid wiping cycles.

— (Low): For slow, steady wiping

cycles.

-- (Intermittent/RainSense™):

See RainSense™ wipers below.

9(Off): Turns off the wipers.

For a single wipe pull the lever

down from the off position. The lever

will return to its original position.

For more cycles, hold the lever

down before releasing it.

RainSense™ Wipers

There is a moisture sensor mounted

on the windshield next to the inside

rearview mirror. When active, the

sensor is able to detect moisture on

the windshield and automatically

control the frequency of the wipes

according to the weather conditions.

To turn on the RainSense feature,

the wipers must be set to the

intermittent delay setting on

the windshield wiper lever.

To turn off RainSense, move the

lever downwards.

Notice: Going through an

automatic car wash with the

wipers on can damage them.

Turn the wipers off when going

through an automatic car wash.

Instruments and Controls 4-9

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION

In freezing weather, do not use

your washer until the windshield

is warmed. Otherwise the

washer ﬂuid can form ice on

the windshield, blocking your

vision.

Pull the windshield wiper lever

toward you to spray washer ﬂuid

on the windshield. The wipers will

run for a few cycles to clear the

windshield. For more wash cycles,

pull the lever forward and hold.

Rear Window Wiper/

Washer

For vehicles with the rear wiper/

washer feature, it is turned on by

moving the windshield wiper lever.

To turn the rear wiper on or off,

push the windshield wiper lever.

To turn on the rear washer, hold the

windshield wiper lever toward the

front of the vehicle to spray the rear

window.

The rear wiper turns on

automatically when the windshield

wiper is turned on and the shift lever

is in REVERSE (R).

The rear window washer uses the

same ﬂuid bottle as the windshield

washer. However, the rear window

washer will run out of ﬂuid before the

windshield washer. If washer ﬂuid

sprays onto the windshield but not

the rear window, check the ﬂuid

level. See Windshield Washer

Fluid on page 9-20.

For information on replacing the

rear wiper blades, see Windshield

Wiper Blade Replacement on

page 9-21.

Accessory Power

Outlet(s)

The 12-volt accessory power outlets

can be used to connect electrical

equipment, such as a cellular phone.

There may be a accessory power

outlet located inside the console

below the climate controls.

Notice: Leaving electrical

equipment on for extended

periods will drain the battery.

Always turn off electrical

equipment when not in use and

do not plug in equipment that

exceeds the maximum 20 ampere

rating.

Certain electrical accessories may

not be compatible with the accessory

power outlet and could result in

blown vehicle or adapter fuses.

If there is a problem, see your

dealer/retailer for additional

information on the accessory

power outlet.

4-10 Instruments and Controls

Notice: Adding any electrical

equipment to your vehicle

may damage it or keep other

components from working as they

should. The repairs would not be

covered by your warranty. Check

with your dealer/retailer before

adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment,

be sure to follow the installation

instructions included with the

equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the

power outlet can cause damage

not covered by your warranty.

Do not hang any type of

accessory or accessory bracket

from the plug because the

power outlets are designed for

accessory power plugs only.

Warning Lights,

Gages, and Indicators

This section describes the warning

lights and gages on the vehicle.

Warning lights and gages can signal

that something is wrong before it

becomes serious enough to cause

an expensive repair or replacement.

Paying attention to the warning lights

and gages could prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when there

may be or is a problem with one

of the vehicle’s functions. Some

warning lights come on brieﬂy when

the engine is started to indicate they

are working.

Gages can indicate when there may

be or is a problem with one of the

vehicle’s functions. Often gages

and warning lights work together

to indicate a problem with the

vehicle.

When one of the warning lights

comes on and stays on while

driving, or when one of the gages

shows there may be a problem,

check the section that explains

what to do. Follow this manual’s

advice. Waiting to do repairs can

be costly and even dangerous.

Instruments and Controls 4-11

Instrument Panel Cluster

The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how fast

you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and

economically.

United States Base Automatic Transmission version shown, Canada, Manual Transmission and Uplevel

similar

4-12 Instruments and Controls

Speedometer and

Odometer

The speedometer lets you see your

speed in both miles per hour (mph)

or kilometers per hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far

your vehicle has been driven,

in either miles or kilometers.

If your vehicle needs a new

odometer installed, the new one will

be set to the mileage total of the old

odometer. If it cannot, it will be set at

zero and a label must be put on the

driver’s door to show the old mileage

reading when the new odometer was

installed. If the mileage is unknown,

the label should then indicate

“previous mileage unknown.”

Trip Odometer(s)

The trip odometer, located at the

center of the instrument panel

cluster, tells how far the vehicle

has been driven since the trip

odometer was set to zero.

To reset the trip odometer, hold the

reset stem, located to the right of

the speedometer, for approximately

one second while the trip odometer

is displayed. The engine must

be turned on.

Service Display

The vehicle may have a display

above the odometer that shows

when service is needed. The number

that displays with “INSP” is the

remaining distance that can be

driven until service is required.

See Engine Oil Life System on

page 9-9 and the index of the Saturn

Astra Limited Warranty, Maintenance

and Owner Assistance Information

Manual.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the engine

speed in revolutions per minute.

Instruments and Controls 4-13

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt Reminder

Light

There is a Driver Safety Belt

Reminder Light on the instrument

panel cluster.

When the engine is started this light

and chime will come on and stay on

for several seconds to remind people

to fasten their safety belts. The light

will also begin to ﬂash.

This cycle repeats if the driver

remains unbuckled and the vehicle

is moving.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled,

neither the light nor chime will

come on.

Passenger Safety Belt

Reminder Light

If your vehicle has this light, it will

operate the same as the Safety Belt

Reminder Light except that it is

meant for the front passenger.

If the passenger’s safety belt is

buckled, neither the chime nor the

light will come on.

Airbag Readiness Light

This light tells you if there is an

electrical problem. The system check

includes the airbag sensor, the

pretensioners, the airbag modules,

the wiring and the crash sensing

and diagnostic module. For more

information on the airbag system,

see Airbag System on page 1-23.

This light will come on and stay

on for several seconds when you

start your vehicle. Then the light

should go out.

4-14 Instruments and Controls

If the airbag readiness light stays on

after you start the vehicle or comes

on when your are driving, your airbag

system may not work properly. Have

your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light

stays on after the vehicle is

started, it means the airbag

system may not be working

properly. The airbags in the

vehicle may not inﬂate in a

crash, or they could even

inﬂate without a crash.

To help avoid injury, have the

vehicle serviced right away.

Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator

The vehicle has a passenger

sensing system. The rearview

mirror has a passenger airbag

status indicator.

When you start the vehicle, the

passenger airbag status indicator

will light ON and OFF, or the symbol

for on and off, for several seconds

as a system check. Then, after

several more seconds, the status

indicator will light either ON or OFF,

or either the on or off symbol to let

you know the status of the right

front passenger’s frontal and

seat-mounted side impact airbags.

United States

Canada

Instruments and Controls 4-15

If the word ON or the on symbol is

lit on the passenger airbag status

indicator, it means that the right

front passenger’s frontal airbag and

seat-mounted side impact airbag

are enabled (may inﬂate).

{CAUTION

If the on indicator comes on

when you have a rear-facing

child restraint installed in the

right front passenger’s seat,

it means that the passenger

sensing system has not turned

off the passenger’s frontal

airbag and seat-mounted side

impact airbag (if equipped).

A child in a rear-facing child

restraint can be seriously

injured or killed if the right front

passenger’s airbag inﬂates.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

This is because the back of the

rear-facing child restraint would

be very close to the inﬂating

airbag. Do not use a rear-facing

child restraint in the right front

passenger’s seat if the airbag is

turned on.

{CAUTION

Even though the passenger

sensing system is designed

to turn off the right front

passenger’s frontal airbag and

seat-mounted side impact

airbag (if equipped) if the

system detects a rear-facing

child restraint, no system is

fail-safe, and no one can

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

guarantee that an airbag will

not deploy under some unusual

circumstance, even though it is

turned off. We recommend that

rear-facing child restraints be

secured in a rear seat, even if

the airbag is or airbags are off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol

is lit on the passenger airbag

status indicator, it means that the

passenger sensing system has

turned off the right front passenger’s

frontal airbag and seat-mounted

side impact airbag. See Passenger

Sensing System on page 1-30 for

other problems OnStar cannot

control that may prevent OnStar

from providing service to you at

any particular time or place. Some

examples are damage to important

parts of your vehicle in an accident,

hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather

or wireless phone network

congestion.

Your Responsibility

You may need to increase the

volume of your radio to hear the

OnStar advisor. If the light next to the

OnStar buttons is red, this means

that your system is not functioning

properly and should be checked

by your dealer/retailer. If the light

appears clear (no light is appearing),

your OnStar subscription has

expired. You can always press the

OnStar button to conﬁrm that your

OnStar equipment is active.

Instruments and Controls 4-41

✍NOTES

4-42 Instruments and Controls

Lighting

Exterior Lamps Controls .....5-1

Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) ....................5-2

Delayed Headlamps ............5-2

Fog Lamps .........................5-2

Instrument Panel

Brightness .........................5-3

Dome Lamp(s) ....................5-3

Entry Lighting .....................5-3

Reading Lamps ..................5-3

Rear Compartment Lamp .....5-4

Battery Run-Down

Protection .........................5-4

Lighting

Exterior Lamps Controls

The exterior lamp control is

located on the instrument panel

to the left of the steering wheel.

Turn the exterior lamp control to the

following positions:

T(Off): Turns off the exterior lamps.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns

the exterior lamps on and off

automatically, depending upon

outside lighting.

;(Parking Lamps): Turns on

the parking lamps together with the

following:

•Taillamps

•Sidemarkers

•License Plate Lamps

2(Headlamps): Turns on the

headlamps, together with the

previously listed lamps.

After 15 minutes with the ignition

switched off and the low-beam

headlamps on, the parking lamps

turn on.

Lighting 5-1

Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL)

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can

make it easier for others to see

the front of your vehicle during the

day. DRL can be helpful in many

different driving conditions, but they

can be especially helpful in the

short periods after dawn and before

sunset. Fully functional daytime

running lamps are required on all

vehicles ﬁrst sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes the

low-beam headlamps turn on at

a reduced brightness when

the following conditions are met:

•The engine is running.

•The light sensor determines it

is night and the exterior lamps

control is in the off position.

•The light sensor determines

it is daytime.

The taillamps and other lamps will

be off.

The DRL turns off when the engine

is not running.

The regular headlamps or parking

lamps should be used when needed.

Delayed Headlamps

Vehicles with headlamp exit delay,

keep the headlamps and taillamps

on for 30 seconds.

To activate:

1. Turn the ignition off and remove

the key from the ignition.

2. Open the driver door.

3. Pull the multifunction lever

toward the steering wheel.

To deactivate, do either of the

following:

•Insert the key into the ignition.

•Pull the multifunction lever toward

the steering wheel again while

the driver door is open.

Fog Lamps

For vehicles with fog lamps, the

button is located on the instrument

panel, to the left of the steering

wheel.

The ignition and headlamps or

parking lamps must be on to turn on

the fog lamps. The fog lamps will not

turn on if the high beam headlamps

or ﬂash to pass are active.

Press the button to turn the fog

lamps on or off. An indicator light on

the instrument panel cluster comes

on when the fog lamps are on.

Some localities have laws that

require the headlamps to be

on along with the fog lamps.

5-2 Lighting

Instrument Panel

Brightness

D(Instrument Panel

Brightness): The knob with this

symbol on it is located next to the

exterior lamps control to the left of

the steering wheel. Push the knob in

all the way until it extends out and

then turn the knob clockwise or

counterclockwise to brighten or dim

the lights. Push the knob back in

when ﬁnished.

Dome Lamp(s)

There are two dome lamps. The rear

dome lamp turns on automatically

with the front dome lamp.

+(On/Off): Press to turn the

front dome lamp on or off while

the doors are closed.

Entry Lighting

With entry lighting, the interior of the

vehicle is illuminated while entering

the vehicle. The interior lamps

turn on brieﬂy when the door

is unlocked using the key or the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter and the ignition is in

LOCK/OFF. After a few seconds

have passed, the interior lamps

will slowly fade out.

Reading Lamps

Front Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps, located on

the headliner, can be controlled

separately by the buttons located

near each lamp.

\(On/Off): Press to turn the lamp

on or off.

Lighting 5-3

Rear Reading Lamps

The rear seat reading lamps can be

turned on while the ignition is on.

9(Off): Press to turn the lamp off.

R(On): Press to turn the lamp on.

Rear Compartment Lamp

The liftgate lamp turns on when the

liftgate is opened and turns off

when the liftgate is closed.

Battery Run-Down

Protection

This feature helps prevent the

battery from being drained, if the

courtesy lamps, reading lamps, sun

visor, glovebox or rear compartment

lamp are left on. If any of these

lamps are left on, they automatically

turn off after approximately

20 minutes, if the ignition is off.

5-4 Lighting

Infotainment

Audio System(s)

Audio System(s) .................6-1

Radio(s) .............................6-2

Theft-Deterrent Feature .....6-24

Audio Steering Wheel

Controls ..........................6-24

Radio Reception ...............6-25

Fixed Mast Antenna ..........6-25

Audio System(s)

Determine which audio system the

vehicle has and then read the

following pages to become familiar

with its features.

{CAUTION

This system provides you with

far greater access to audio

stations and song listings.

Giving extended attention to

entertainment tasks while

driving can cause a crash and

you or others can be injured or

killed. Always keep your eyes on

the road and your mind on the

drive — avoid engaging in

extended searching while

driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is

important for safe driving. See

Defensive Driving on page 8-16.

Here are some ways in which you

can help avoid distraction while

driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

•Familiarize yourself with all of its

controls.

•Familiarize yourself with its

operation.

•Set up your audio system by

presetting your favorite radio

stations, setting the tone, and

adjusting the speakers. Then,

when driving conditions permit,

you can tune to your favorite radio

stations using the presets and

remote control on the steering

wheel. See Audio Steering Wheel

Controls on page 6-24 and the

audio system manual for more

information.

Infotainment 6-1

Radio(s)

System Operation

n/R(Volume/Power): Press

to turn the system on or off. Turn to

increase or decrease the volume.

BC (Board Computer): Press to

use the Board Computer. See DIC

Operation and Displays (Base Level

DIC and Audio) on page 4-27 or DIC

Operation and Displays (Uplevel DIC

and Audio) on page 4-31.

OK: Press to conﬁrm selections

and go to the next page in the

settings menu.

\or ]:Press to change menu

options.

SOUND: Press to enter the sound

settings menu and go to the next

page in sound settings.

SETTINGS: Press to adjust system

and sound settings.

Ignition Logic

When this feature is enabled it turns

the audio system on or off when

the ignition is turned on or off.

To turn the audio system on or off

with Ignition Logic:

•Press n/Ror insert a CD

to turn the audio system on.

Press n/Rto turn the audio

system off when the Ignition

Logic system is disabled and

the ignition is ON/RUN.

•For vehicles with OnStar

, the

audio system will only turn off

if the ignition is OFF and OnStar

is not in use when the Ignition

Logic system is enabled.

CD 30 MP3 Shown, CD 30 Similar

6-2 Infotainment

The Ignition Logic is preset to turn

off the audio system when the

ignition is turned off. To enable or

disable Ignition Logic:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audio

displays.

2. Press \until System displays.

3. Press OK until Ign. Logic

ON or Ign. Logic OFF displays.

4. Press \or ]to select the

setting. The setting is saved

automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to

move back one level in

the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or

BC to turn on that feature.

Audio displays and the system

starts to play if SETTINGS, FM/AM,

CD/MP3, or BC is not pressed

within ﬁve seconds after the setting

is saved.

System Display

The following information shows on

the system display:

•FM or AM, and the current

station frequency if the radio is

active.

•The station name displays if RDS

is activated.

•AS displays if the AS level is

activated.

•CD displays, and the CD title

number or the CD title name

if the CD player is active.

•MP3 displays if the CD is an

MP3 CD.

•RDM displays if the CD is being

played in random mode.

The most recent selected audio

source plays when the audio system

is turned on and the display is lit.

The outside temperature, time,

and date display when the audio

system is turned off and the ignition

is ON/RUN, see Driver Information

Center (DIC) on page 4-26.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set

for each audio source and are

stored separately for each radio

station and the CD player.

Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the Bass:

1. Press SOUND until Bass

appears.

2. Press \or ]to adjust the level

from -12 through +12. The

setting is saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

Infotainment 6-3

Audio displays and the audio

system starts to play if SETTINGS,

FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC is not

pressed within ﬁve seconds after

the setting is saved.

To adjust the Treble:

1. Press SOUND until Treble

appears.

2. Press \or ]to adjust the level

from -12 through +12. The

setting is saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

Adjusting the Sound Settings

There are preset sound settings

designed for different types of music

To adjust the sound settings

using the SOUND button:

1. Press SOUND until Sound

appears.

2. Press \or ]to select between

Rock, Disco, Classic, Jazz,

Vocal, and Off. The setting is

saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

To adjust the sound settings using

the SETTINGS button:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audio

appears.

2. Press OK until Sound appears.

3. Press \or ]to select between

Rock, Disco, Classic, Jazz,

Vocal, and Off. The setting is

saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

6-4 Infotainment

Adjusting the Speakers

(Balance/Fade)

To adjust the Balance using the

SOUND button:

1. Press SOUND until Balance

appears.

2. Press \or ]to adjust the level

from -12 through +12. The

setting is saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

To adjust the Balance using the

SETTINGS button:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audio

appears.

2. Press OK until Balance appears.

3. Press \or ]to adjust the level

from -12 through +12. The setting

is saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

To adjust the Fade using the

SOUND button:

1. Press SOUND until Fader

appears.

2. Press \or ]to adjust the level

from -12 through +12. The

setting is saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

To adjust the Fade using the

SETTINGS button:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audio

appears.

2. Press OK until Fader appears.

3. Press \or ]to adjust the level

from -12 through +12. The

setting is saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

Speed-Dependant Volume

Control (SDVC)

SDVC automatically adjusts the

volume to compensate for road and

wind noise as the vehicle increases

or decreases speed while driving.

To adjust SDVC:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audio

appears.

2. Press OK until SDVC appears.

3. Press \or ]to adjust the

level from 0 through 5. The

setting is saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

Infotainment 6-5

OnStar

Volume

For vehicles with OnStar, the OnStar

Volume is used to set the maximum

initial volume level for the OnStar

system when it is turned on.

To set OnStar Volume:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audio

appears.

2. Press OK until OnStar Vol.

appears.

3. Press \or ]to adjust the level

from -12 through 12. The setting

is saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

On Volume

The On Volume is used to set the

maximum initial volume level for the

audio system when it is turned on.

The maximum initial volume level is

used only if the volume level before

turning the audio system off was

higher than the maximum initial

volume level set. This will work

when the audio system has been

off for at least ﬁve minutes and the

ignition is OFF.

To set the On Volume level:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audio

appears.

2. Press OK until On Volume

appears.

3. Press \or ]to adjust the level

from -12 through 12. The setting

is saved automatically.

•Press SETTINGS again to go

back one level in the menu.

•Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to

display that function.

Using the Radio

FM/AM: Press to select between

FM, FM-AS, AM, and AM-AS,

or to listen to the radio while a CD

is playing.

RDS (Radio Data System): Press

to identify stations by name

instead of the radio frequency.

LOC (LOCAL/DX Function): Press

to change between LOC ON or LOC

OFF. When the LOC function is on,

it searches for the strongest radio

frequency. If none is found, it

automatically search for a weaker

radio frequency. If no frequency

is found after the second search,

the radio returns to the last active

frequency. If a new station search is

not started within one minute, the low

sensitivity (LOCAL) is set when the

next search is started. When LOC

OFF is set, a search is carried out

using the high sensitivity (DX).

6-6 Infotainment

Finding an FM/AM Station

1 - 9 (Station Preset Buttons):

Press to play stations that are

programmed to the radio preset

pushbuttons.

SCN (Station Preset Scan): Press

to start station preset scan. The radio

goes to the ﬁrst preset station, plays

for a few seconds, then goes to the

next preset station. Press SCN again

to stop scanning preset stations.

\or ]:Press to ﬁnd radio stations

using the automatic station search

or the manual station search.

Automatic Station Search: Use

automatic station search when

the radio frequency is unknown.

Press \or ]for more then

one second to have the radio search

for the next station. Seek is shown

on the display and the radio is

muted until a station is found.

If the radio fails to locate a station,

the last active frequency is then

reset. When LOC is activated,

a search for the next strong station

is made. If it is not activated, it

searches the next receivable station.

Manual Station Search: Use

manual station search when

the radio frequency is known.

To use manual station search:

•Press and hold \or ]until the

desired frequency is reached.

•Tap \or ]until the desired

frequency is reached.

Setting Preset Stations

The radio can store up to 36 stations

using the station preset buttons:

•9FM

•9 FM - AS (Autostore)

•9AM

•9 AM - AS (Autostore)

Infotainment 6-7

Radio stations can be stored

manually, and by using Autostore.

To manually store preset stations:

1. Select FM or AM and tune to the

desired radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the nine

station preset buttons, the radio

brieﬂy mutes and displays the

previously stored station. The

new station has been stored

when the radio begins playing

again.

3. Repeat the steps for each radio

station to be stored.

AS (Autostore): Press to

automatically store the nine

strongest stations in the selected

radio band.

To use Autostore:

1. Select FM or AM.

2. Press and hold AS until a beep

is heard.

3. The radio begins storing the

stations in the nine preset

button locations.

Using the CD Player

Display Options

The display can be changed

depending on what type of CD

is in the CD player. The display

options are:

Audio CD without CD text:

•Track number and playing time.

Audio CD with CD text:

•Track title

•Artist name

•Tack number and playing time

•CD name

To change the display:

1. Press CD/MP3 twice, CD info

appears on the display.

2. Press \or ]to select the

display type.

3. After about ﬁve seconds, the

selected display type is saved.

Loading a CD

To load a CD, insert the CD label

side up in the CD player. The CD

player pulls the CD in automatically.

•The display shows Read CD, the

CD symbol and the number of CD

tracks.

•When the ﬁrst track starts to play,

the display shows track 1 and the

playing time.

Playing a CD

CD/MP3: Press to play a CD or

MP3 CD that is already loaded into

the CD player while the radio is

playing. See “Using an MP3” in the

owner manual index.

\or ]:Press to go to the next or

previous track. Press and hold to

fast forward or fast rewind within

a track and the CD plays at a higher

speed and a reduced volume.

Z:Press to eject a CD, Eject CD

is displayed and the radio begins

playing.

6-8 Infotainment

Random: Press CD/MP3 three

times to hear the tracks in random,

rather than sequential order. Press

\or ]to select between Random

on and Random off. RDM shows on

the display when random is in use.

Using an MP3 CD

The CD 30 MP3 is capable of

playing MP3 CDs that have been

recorded to a CD-R.

Supported File Structure

The CD 30 MP3 supports up to:

•99 albums.

•367 tracks.

•Bit rates up to 256 kbps.

File Naming

Files must be named .mp3 for the

CD to work. ID3 tags are supported.

The following information shows

on the display when the CD MP3 is

playing.

MP3 CDs recorded without ID3 tags

display:

•File name

•Track number and playing time

•Album name

MP3 CDs recorded with ID3 tags

display:

•Track title

•Artist name

•Track number and playing time

•Album name

To change the display:

1. Press CD/MP3 twice, CD info

appears on the display.

2. Press \or ]to select the

display type.

3. After about ﬁve seconds, the

selected display type is saved.

Playing an MP3

CD/MP3: Press to play an MP3 CD

that is already loaded into the CD

player while the radio is playing.

Selecting a Track

\or ]:Press to go to the next or

previous track. Press and hold to

fast forward or fast rewind within a

track. During fast forward, the

CD plays at a higher speed and a

reduced volume.

Z:Press to eject a CD, Eject CD

appears on the display and the

radio begins playing.

Selecting an Album

To select a different album when

the MP3 CD contains several

albums:

1. Press CD/MP3.

2. Press \or ]until the desired

album displays.

Infotainment 6-9

Random Mode

MP3 CD can be played in the

following random modes:

•Random album: Tracks from

the selected album are played

randomly.

•Random CD: All tracks from all

albums are played randomly.

•Random Off: Turns off

random play.

To use random:

1. Press CD/MP3 three times.

2. Press \or ]to select between

Random album, Random CD

and Random Off.

RDM shows on the display when

random is use.

Care of CD’s and the CD

Player

Care of CDs

Store CDs in their original cases or

other protective cases and away

from direct sunlight and dust. The CD

player scans the bottom of the disc.

If the bottom of a CD is damaged it

may not play properly or at all. Do

not touch the bottom of a CD while

handling it. Pick up CDs by grasping

the outer edges or the edge of the

hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is dirty, take

a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a

clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral

detergent solution mixed with water,

and clean it. Make sure the wiping

process starts from the center to

the edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a CD, it could

get caught in the CD player. Use a

marking pen to write on the top of the

CD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, they

could damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to

a CD, or more than one CD is

inserted into the slot at a time,

or an attempt is made to play

scratched or damaged CDs, the

CD player could be damaged.

While using the CD player, use

only CDs in good condition

without any label, load one CD at a

time, and keep the CD player and

the loading slot free of foreign

materials, liquids, and debris.

6-10 Infotainment

System Operation

R(Volume/Power): Press to

turn the system on or off. Turn to

increase or decrease the volume.

BC (Board Computer): Press

to use the Board Computer, see

DIC Warnings and Messages

(Base and Uplevel Systems) on

page 4-37.

[(Multifunction Knob): Turn

to select a menu item, press

to enable or disable a menu item.

\/]/_/^(Four-way Switch):

Press to select menu options.

SOUND: Press to enter the sound

settings menu and go to the

next page in sound settings.

SETTINGS: Press to adjust system

and sound settings.

Ignition Logic

When this feature is enabled it turns

the audio system on or off when

the ignition is turned on or off.

To turn the audio system on or off

with the Ignition Logic:

•Press Ror Zto turn the audio

system on. Press Rto turn

the audio system off when the

Ignition Logic system is disabled

and the ignition is ON/RUN.

•For vehicles with OnStar

, the

audio system will only turn off

if the ignition is OFF and OnStar

is not in use when the Ignition

Logic system is enabled.

CDC 40

Infotainment 6-11

The Ignition Logic is preset to turn

off the audio system when the

ignition is turned off. To enable

or disable Ignition Logic:

1. Press SETTINGS, System

Settings displays.

2. Turn the multifunction knob to

select Ign. Logic and press

the multifunction knob to select

or un-select the option.

System Display

The following information shows on

the system display:

•FM or AM displays, and the

current station frequency or

station name if the radio is active.

•The station name displays

when RDS stations are active.

•The station name displays if RDS

is activated.

•AS displays if AS is activated.

•CD displays along with the CD

number, CD track number, CD

title, artists name or album

name plus track time and track

name, if the CD player is active.

•CD in displays if more than one

CD is inserted.

•MP3 displays if the CD is an

MP3 CD.

•RDM displays if the CD is being

played back in random mode.

•Tdisplays if Random CD is on.

•Udisplays if Random

Magazine is on.

•Sdisplays if repeat track is on.

•udisplays if Scan CD is on.

The most recent selected audio

source plays when the audio system

is turned on and the display is lit.

The outside temperature, time,

and date display when the audio

system is turned off and the ignition

is ON/RUN, see Driver Information

Center (DIC) on page 4-26.

Menu System

The audio systems menu contains

types of menu pages:

Selection pages

Selection pages have a selection

menu on the left side of the screen

showing a preview of the menu

items. Selection pages lead

to navigation or settings pages.

Feature pages

Feature pages are menu pages.

Feature pages also contain

menu items which can be selected

and lead to other navigation or

settings pages. The Tuner menu

is an example of a feature page.

Settings pages

Setting pages are menu pages

where the audio system settings can

be changed.

6-12 Infotainment

Menus

The menus of the audio systems

are structured in levels. The current

menu level is indicated by vertical

lines at the edge of the screen.

Selecting from a Menu

The items within a menu are

selected by turning the multifunction

knob to move the cursor. The cursor

highlights the menu item being

selected.

To select a menu item:

1. Turn the multifunction knob

until the desired menu item

is highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob to

select the function or to display

another menu.

•Selected menu items display

as Vor a.

•Un-selected menu items display

as (or o.

To exit from a menu:

•Turn the multifunction knob to

the left until Return is displayed

and then press the knob.

•Press CDC, FM/AM, SETTINGS,

SOUND, or MAIN at any time to

exit from a menu and use that

function.

Selecting the Audio Menu

The Audio menu allows access to

FM, AM, CD, and Sound menus.

To access the Audio menu from

one of these menus:

Turn the multifunction knob to the

left until Return displays and

then press the knob.

Selecting from a List

Some menus are displayed in the

form of lists.

•If the cursor is moved to the

top or bottom area of the display,

other list items appear. A

scroll-bar on the right edge of the

display indicates the current

cursor position in the list.

•The last list item selected is

marked with an arrow in some

lists.

•The name of the list and the

number of items in it are displayed

above the list.

To select from a list:

1. Turn the multifunction knob until

the desired item is highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob to

select the item.

Infotainment 6-13

Overlay Menus

Additional notes and information on

the audio system or other vehicle

components may appear on

the display as an overlay in some

cases. The current menu is overlaid

with the information box. Some

settings have to be conﬁrmed,

others are automatically enabled

after a short time.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set

for each audio source and are

stored separately for each radio

station and the CD player.

Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the Bass:

1. Press SOUND and select the

Sound menu item.

2. Select Treble - Bass.

3. Select Bass from the menu and

turn the multifunction knob to

adjust the level.

4. Press the multifunction knob to

save the setting.

Bass tones are automatically

adjusted to the driving speed to

compensate for rolling and ambient

noise. The setting cannot be

changed.

To adjust the Treble:

1. Press SOUND and select the

Sound menu item.

2. Select Treble - Bass.

3. Select Treble from the menu and

turn the multifunction knob to

adjust the level.

4. Press the multifunction knob to

save the setting.

Adjusting the Equalizer

The equalizer allows changes to be

made to seven frequencies.

To adjust the equalizer:

1. Press SOUND and select the

Sound menu item.

2. Select Equalizer.

3. Select the desired frequency and

turn the multifunction knob to

adjust the level.

4. Press the multifunction knob to

save the setting.

5. Repeat these steps for each

frequency.

After making changes to the

equalizer, the user option in the

Sound menu is enabled.

6-14 Infotainment

Adjusting the Sound Settings

There are preset sound settings

designed for different types of

music.

To adjust the sound settings:

1. Press SOUND and select the

Sound menu item.

2. Select Sound.

3. Select: User, Jazz, Speech, Pop,

Classical, and Rock.

4. Press the multifunction knob to

save the setting.

Adjusting the Speakers

(Balance/Fade)

To adjust the Balance:

1. Press SOUND and select the

Sound menu item.

2. Select Fader - Balance.

3. Select Balance from the menu

and turn the multifunction knob

to adjust the level.

4. Press the multifunction knob to

save the setting.

To adjust the Fade:

1. Press SOUND and select the

Sound menu item.

2. Select Fader - Balance.

3. Select Fader from the menu and

turn the multifunction knob to

adjust the level.

4. Press the multifunction knob to

save the setting.

Adjusting the Sound Position

The sound position for the audio

system can be adjusted. The

settings are:

Driver: Adjusts the sound position

for the drivers seat.

Front: Adjusts the sound position

for the front seats.

All Positions: The sound is

adjusted for all seats.

To adjust the sound position:

1. Press SOUND and select the

Sound menu item.

2. Select Position and then select

the desired sound position.

3. Press the multifunction knob to

save the setting.

Infotainment 6-15

Speed-Dependant Volume

Control (SDVC)

SDVC automatically adjusts the

volume for road and wind noise as

the vehicle increases or decreases

speed while driving.

To adjust SDVC:

1. Press SOUND, then SETTINGS

and select Volume from

the menu.

2. Select SDVC.

3. Turn the multifunction knob to

adjust the level.

4. Press the multifunction knob to

save the setting.

OnStar

Volume

For vehicles with OnStar, the OnStar

Volume is used to set the maximum

initial volume level for the OnStar

system when it is turned on.

To set OnStar Volume:

1. Press SOUND, then SETTINGS

and select Volume from

the menu.

2. Select OnStar IN.

3. Turn the multifunction knob to

adjust the level.

4. Press the multifunction knob to

save the setting.

Start-up Volume

The Start-up Volume is used to set

the maximum initial volume level

for the audio system when it

is turned on.

The maximum initial volume level is

used when the volume level before

turning the audio system off was

higher than the maximum initial

volume level set, or if the volume is

blow the maximum level.

To set the On Volume level:

1. Press SOUND, then SETTINGS

and select Volume from

the menu.

2. Select Start-up Volume.

3. Turn the multifunction knob to

adjust the level.

4. Press the multifunction knob to

save the setting.

6-16 Infotainment

Using the Radio

FM/AM: Press to select between

FM, FM-AS, AM, and AM-AS,

or to listen to the radio while a CD

is playing. The Tuner Menu

displays.

LOC (LOCAL/DX Function): Press

to change between LOC ON or

LOC OFF. When the LOC function

is on, it searches for the strongest

radio frequency. If none is found,

it automatically searches for a

weaker radio frequency. If no

frequency is found after the second

search, the radio returns to the

last active frequency. If a new

station search is not started within

one minute, the low sensitivity

(LOCAL) is set when the next

search is started. When LOC OFF

is set, a search is carried out

using the high sensitivity (DX).

Finding an FM/AM Station

1 - 9 (Station Preset Buttons):

Press to play stations that are

programmed to the radio preset

pushbuttons.

Automatic Station Search: Use

automatic station search when

the radio frequency is unknown.

The radio is volume is muted

while the radio searches for a

station with strong reception. If the

radio is unable to ﬁnd a station, it

automatically switches to a more

sensitive search level. The radio

returns to the last station playing

if it fails to locate a station.

To use automatic station search, do

one of the following:

•Press and hold \or ]until

seek displays.

•Select tor ufrom the radio

menu with the multifunction knob.

Manual Station Search: Use

manual station search when

the radio frequency is known.

To use manual station search with

the four-way switch:

•Press and hold _or ^until the

desired frequency is reached.

•Press _or ^repeatedly until the

desired frequency is reached.

To use manual station search with

the multifunction knob:

1. Select Manual from the

Tuner menu.

2. Turn the multifunction knob until

the desired frequency is reached

and press the knob.

Infotainment 6-17

Setting Preset Stations

The radio can store up to

36 stations using the station

preset buttons:

•9FM

•9 FM - AS (Autostore)

•9AM

•9 AM - AS (Autostore)

Radio stations can be stored using

the station preset buttons, the

multifunction knob, and by using

Autostore.

To manually store stations using the

station preset buttons:

1. Select FM or AM and tune to the

desired radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the

9 station preset buttons, the

radio brieﬂy mutes and displays

the previously stored station.

The new station is stored and

the radio begins playing.

3. Repeat the steps for each radio

station to be stored.

To manually store stations using the

multifunction knob:

1. Select the desired radio station

and select Store from the Tuner

Menu, a list of all stored

stations is displayed.

2. Turn the multifunction knob to

choose the location for the

station to be stored and press

the multifunction knob.

To store stations using Autostore:

1. Select FM or AM and then select

Autostore from the Tuner Menu.

2. The Autostore menu is displayed,

and the automatic station storing

is started.

3. The nine strongest stations in the

selected band are stored to the

preset buttons.

Using the CD Player

The CDC 40 is capable of playing

CDs, MP3 CD-Rs, and mixed mode

CD-Rs that have both audio and

MP3 tracks on it.

The CD changer holds a maximum

of 6 CDs, and can play smaller

3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an

adapter ring.

Loading a CD

To load CDs:

1. Press Z(Eject), the

CD-Changer menu displays.

2. Select an empty CD

compartment using the

multifunction knob, Please

insert CD now displays.

3. Insert a CD into the slot, Reading

CD displays and aappears next

to the selected position.

4. Repeat Step 2 to load

additional CDs.

6-18 Infotainment

Display Options

The display can be changed

depending on what type of CD

is in the CD player. The display

options are:

•Disabled ( o): Track number,

CD number, album number

and playing time for an audio CD.

•Enabled ( a): CD name,

track name, artist name,

and album name for an audio CD

with CD text.

To change the display:

1. Select Extras from the CD Menu.

2. Enable or disable the Display

track box.

Playing a CD

CDC: Press to play a CD that

is already loaded into the CD player

while the radio is playing. The

CD Menu displays.

Selecting a Track

Tracks can be selected using the

four-way switch or the CD menu

functions.

Selecting a track using the four-way

switch:

\or ]:Press to go to the next or

previous track within a CD.

Selecting a track using the CD

menu and the tor ufunction:

1. Turn the multifunction knob until

Track is highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob until

the desired track is displayed.

Selecting a track using the CD menu

and the Track function:

1. Select Track from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired track from

the menu.

Searching Within a Track

To search within a track using the

four-way switch or the CD menu

functions:

To search using the four-way

switch:

1. Press and hold \or ].

2. Release \or ]when the

desired point in the track is

reached.

To search using the CD menu

1. Select ror [.

2. Select ror [again when the

desired point in the track is

reached.

Infotainment 6-19

Selecting CD

CDs can be selected by:

•Pressing the appropriate station

preset button.

•Pressing _or ^on the four-way

switch.

•Using the CD menu function.

To use the CD menu function:

1. Select CD from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired CD.

Random Mode

There are two modes for random:

•Random play CD.

•Random magazine.

Tracks on the current CD are

played in random order for Random

play CD:

To use Random play CD:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Random CD, and T

displays.

To turn off random:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Normal, and T

disappears.

4 tracks per CD are played before

changing to the next CD for Random

magazine:

To use random for all CDs:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Random Magazine, and

Udisplays.

To turn off random:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Normal, and U

disappears.

Repeat Track

The Repeat function repeats the

current track. The function can

be enabled and disabled by using

the four-way switch or the CD menu.

To use repeat using the four-way

switch:

1. Press and hold _until Sappears

on the display.

2. Press and hold ^until Sis no

longer on the display to turn

off repeat track.

To use repeat using the CD menu:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Repeat Track, Sappears

on the display.

To turn off repeat using the

CD menu:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Normal, Sdisappears

from the display.

6-20 Infotainment

Scan CD

The Scan CD function scans the

ﬁrst ten seconds of each track

on the current CD. The function can

be enabled and disabled by using

the four-way switch or the CD menu.

To use Scan CD using the

four-way switch:

1. Press and hold _until u

appears on the display.

2. Press and hold ^until uis no

longer on the display to turn off

repeat track.

To use Scan CD using the

CD menu:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Scan CD, uappears

on the display.

To turn off Scan CD using the

CD menu:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Scan CD, udisappears

from the display.

Ejecting a CD

To eject a CD:

1. Press Z.

2. Select the desired CD to eject by

using the station preset buttons

or the multifunction knob.

To eject all CDs:

1. Press and hold Zuntil Eject all

CDs displays.

2. Press the multifunction knob to

conﬁrm. The CDs are ejected.

Using an MP3 or Mixed

Mode CD

Supported File Structure

The CDC 40 supports up to:

•253 albums.

•65,535 tracks.

•Bit rates up to 256 kbps.

File Naming

Files must be named .mp3 for the

CD to work. ID3 tags are supported.

The following information shows

on the display when a CD MP3, or

a mixed mode CD is playing.

•CD number

•Album name

•Track title and artist

Infotainment 6-21

Playing an MP3 or Mixed

Mode CD

CDC: Press to play an MP3 CD

that is already loaded into the

CD player while the radio is playing.

The CD Menu displays.

Selecting a Track

Tracks can be selected using the

four-way switch or the CD menu

functions.

Selecting a track using the four-way

switch:

\or ]:Press to go to the next or

previous track within an album.

Selecting a track using the CD menu

and the tor ufunction:

1. Turn the multifunction knob until

is highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob until

the desired track is displayed.

Selecting a track using the CD

menu and the Track function:

1. Select Track from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired track from

the menu.

Searching Within a Track

To search within a track using the

four-way switch or the CD menu

functions:

To search using the four-way

switch:

1. Press and hold \or ].

2. Release \or ]when the

desired point in the track is

reached.

To search using the CD menu

1. Select ror [.

2. Select ror [again when the

desired point in the track is

reached.

Selecting an MP3 or Mixed Mode

Album

CDs can be selected by:

•Pressing the appropriate station

preset button.

•Pressing _or ^on the four-way

switch.

•Using the CD menu function.

To use the CD menu function:

1. Select Album from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired Album.

Random Mode

MP3 CDs and Mixed Mode CDs can

be played in random order. There

are two modes for random:

•Random play CD.

•Random magazine.

To turn off random:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Normal.

6-22 Infotainment

Tracks play in the following order for

Random play CD:

•MP3 CD: If there are ﬁve or

fewer albums on an MP3

CD, four tracks per album are

played in random order. If there

are more than ﬁve albums on

the MP3 CD, one track is played

per album. Tracks from the

selected album are played

randomly.

•Mixed Mode CD: On a Mixed

Mode CD, the tracks from the

audio part are played ﬁrst

in random order. Then the tracks

from the MP3 part are played

as described above.

To use Random play CD:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Random CD, T

displays.

Tracks play in the following order for

Random magazine:

•MP3 CD: If there are ﬁve or

fewer albums on an MP3

CD, four tracks per album are

played before changing to

the next CD. If there are more

than ﬁve albums, one track

per album is played before

changing to the next CD.

•Mixed Mode CD: On a Mixed

Mode CD, the ﬁrst of all four

tracks from the audio part

are played in random order and

then the system changes to

the next CD. The next time the

system changes to the Mixed

Mode CD, the tracks from

the MP3 part are played as

described above.

To use random for all CDs:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Random Magazine,

Udisplays.

Care of CD’s and the CD

Player

Care of CDs

Store CDs in their original cases or

other protective cases and away

from direct sunlight and dust. The CD

player scans the bottom of the disc.

If the bottom of a CD is damaged it

may not play properly or at all. Do not

touch the bottom of a CD while

handling it. Pick up CDs by grasping

the outer edges or the edge of the

hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is dirty, take

a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a

clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral

detergent solution mixed with water,

and clean it. Make sure the wiping

process starts from the center to

the edge.

Infotainment 6-23

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a CD, it could

get caught in the CD player. Use a

marking pen to write on the top of the

CD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, they

could damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to a

CD, or more than one CD is

inserted into the slot at a time,

or an attempt is made to play

scratched or damaged CDs, the

CD player could be damaged.

While using the CD player, use

only CDs in good condition

without any label, load one CD at a

time, and keep the CD player and

the loading slot free of foreign

materials, liquids, and debris.

Theft-Deterrent Feature

The audio system is equipped

with an electronic safety system to

prevent theft, and only works in the

vehicle.

Audio Steering Wheel

Controls

Some audio controls can be

adjusted at the steering wheel.

Several functions of the audio

system can be operated with the

audio remote control buttons and

the rotary control located on

both sides of the steering wheel.

Depending on the vehicle’s features,

see the following audio controls:

Z(Rotary Control): Manually

seek a station by turning to move

the cursor either to the previous

or next screen entry. Press to

conﬁrm the selection.

For the DIC (Driver Information

Center), press the rotary control to

call up the DIC menu. Press to

reset the current value. Press and

hold for two seconds to reset

all of the values.

Y:Press to go to the next preset

station if playing the radio.

Press to go to the beginning of a

currently playing CD or to the

next album on an MP3.

6-24 Infotainment

X:Press to toggle between the

radio and CD or MP3 as an

active source for playback.

^/_:Press the arrows to go back

or advance to the previous or

next preset station if playing the

radio. Press and hold to scroll

through the preset stations.

Press to go back or advance one

track at a time on a CD.

Press to quickly reverse or advance

through the tracks within a CD.

3(volume): Turn the rotary

control to adjust the volume. Press

and hold to adjust the volume

continuously.

Radio Reception

Frequency interference and static

can occur during normal radio

reception if items such as cell phone

chargers, vehicle convenience

accessories, and external electronic

devices are plugged into the

accessory power outlet. If there is

interference or static, unplug the item

from the accessory power outlet.

The range for most AM stations is

greater than for FM, especially at

night. The longer range can cause

station frequencies to interfere with

each other. For better radio

reception, most AM radio stations

boost the power levels during the

day, and then reduce these levels

during the night. Static can also

occur when things like storms and

power lines interfere with radio

reception. When this happens, try

reducing the treble on your radio.

FM Stereo

FM stereo gives the best sound,

but FM signals only reach about

10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).

Tall buildings or hills can interfere

with FM signals, causing the

sound to fade in and out.

Fixed Mast Antenna

The ﬁxed mast antenna can

withstand most car washes without

being damaged, or it can be

removed. If the mast should ever

become slightly bent, straighten

it out by hand. If the mast is badly

bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure

the mast is still tightened to the

antenna base located on the roof of

the vehicle.

Infotainment 6-25

✍NOTES

6-26 Infotainment

Climate Controls

Climate Control System ......7-1

Outlet Adjustment ...............7-4

Climate Controls

Climate Control System

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with

this system.

Operation

The air delivery mode or fan speed

can be manually adjusted.

Air Delivery Mode Knob

To change the current air delivery

mode, use the left knob to select

one of the following:

)(Bi-Level): This mode directs

air to the instrument panel outlets

and to the ﬂoor outlets. Cooler air is

directed to the upper outlets and

warmer air to the ﬂoor outlets.

Climate Controls 7-1

Y(Vent): This mode directs air to

the instrument panel outlets.

X(Defog): This mode directs air

to the windshield and front door

windows. To reduce fogging, press

#to turn on the air conditioner.

The fan must also be on.

W(Defog/Floor): This mode

directs air to the windshield, front

door windows, and ﬂoor outlets.

To reduce fogging, press #to turn

on the air conditioner. The fan

must also be on.

[(Floor): This mode directs

most of the air to the ﬂoor outlets.

Temperature Control Knob

Turn the center knob clockwise or

counterclockwise to increase or

decrease the temperature inside the

vehicle.

Fan Speed Control Knob

Turn the right knob clockwise or

counterclockwise to increase

or decrease the fan speed. The

speed settings can be adjusted

between 1 (Low) and 4 (High).

When the fan is off, the air

conditioning compressor is also off.

There will be some airﬂow from

the outlets when driving, even with

the fan in the off position.

A(Fan): Select this position to

turn the fan off.

Air Conditioning

For vehicles with air conditioning.

#(Air Conditioning): Press

to turn the air conditioning system

on or off. An indicator light inside

the button comes on when the air

conditioning is activated. The air

conditioning can only be operated

if the engine is on and the fan is

running.

When the air conditioning is on

the air is cooled and dehumidiﬁed.

If cooling or dehumidiﬁcation is not

desired, turn off the air conditioning

to save fuel.

On hot days, open the windows

brieﬂy to let the hot inside air

escape, then close them. This helps

to reduce the time it takes for the

vehicle to cool down.

7-2 Climate Controls

For quicker cool down, do the

following:

1. Press #to turn on the air

conditioning.

2. Select Ymode.

3. Set the temperature knob to the

coldest temperature.

4. Set the fan knob to 4.

5. Open all vents.

Recirculation

^(Recirculation): Press to

turn the recirculation mode on or off.

An indicator light inside the button

comes on when the recirculation

mode is active. This mode

recirculates air inside the passenger

compartment and prevents outside

air from entering the vehicle.

The quality of the passenger

compartment air may decrease

since the amount of outside

air entering the vehicle is reduced.

When the recirculation mode is

used without air conditioning, the

air humidity increases, and the

windows may fog. Avoid using the

recirculation mode during high

periods of humidity or cool outside

temperatures since this may result in

increased window fogging. If window

fogging is experienced, select the

defrost mode.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses a

warming grid to remove fog from the

rear window.

The rear window defogger will only

work when the ignition is in

ON/RUN.

=(Rear Window Defogger):

Press to turn the rear window

defogger on or off. An indicator

light inside the button will be lit

when in use.

If your vehicle has heated mirrors,

they turn on when the rear window

defogger button is pressed. Press

the button again to turn them off.

For more information, see Outside

Power Mirror(s) on page 2-12.

The rear window defogger will stay

on for approximately 15 minutes

after the button is pressed, unless

the ignition is turned off.

Notice: Do not use anything

sharp on the inside of the rear

window. If you do, you could cut

or damage the warming grid, and

the repairs would not be covered

by the vehicle warranty. Do not

attach a temporary vehicle

license, tape, a decal or anything

similar to the defogger grid.

Climate Controls 7-3

Outlet Adjustment

Use the thumbwheel below the air

outlets to change the direction of the

air ﬂow. Use the vertical thumbwheel

next to the outlets to control the

amount of air ﬂow or to shut off the

airﬂow completely.

Keep all outlets open whenever

possible for best system

performance.

Operation Tips

•Clear away any ice, snow, or

leaves from the air inlets at

the base of the windshield that

can block the ﬂow of air into

the vehicle.

•Use of non-GM approved hood

deﬂectors can adversely affect

the performance of the system.

•Keep the path under all seats

clear of objects to help circulate

the air inside the vehicle

more effectively.

•If fogging reoccurs while in vent

or bi-level modes with mild

temperature throughout the

vehicle, turn on the air conditioner

to reduce windshield fogging.

7-4 Climate Controls

Driving and

Operating

Starting and Operating

Your Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-In .........8-2

Ignition Positions ................8-2

Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) .....................8-3

Starting the Engine .............8-3

Engine Heater ....................8-4

Automatic Transmission

Operation ..........................8-5

Manual Transmission

Operation ..........................8-9

Parking Brake ...................8-10

Shifting Into Park ..............8-11

Shifting Out of Park ..........8-13

Parking the Vehicle ...........8-13

Parking Over Things

That Burn ........................8-13

Engine Exhaust .................8-14

Running the Vehicle

While Parked ..................8-14

Driving Your Vehicle

Defensive Driving ..............8-16

Drunk Driving ....................8-16

Control of a Vehicle ..........8-17

Braking .............................8-17

Antilock Brake

System (ABS) .................8-18

StabiliTrak

System ..........8-19

Steering ............................8-20

Off-Road Recovery ............8-22

Passing .............................8-23

Loss of Control .................8-23

Driving at Night .................8-24

Driving in Rain and on

Wet Roads ......................8-25

Before Leaving on a

Long Trip ........................8-26

Highway Hypnosis .............8-26

Hill and Mountain

Roads .............................8-26

Winter Driving ...................8-27

If Your Vehicle is Stuck

in Sand, Mud, Ice,

or Snow ..........................8-29

Rocking Your Vehicle to

Get It Out .......................8-30

Loading the Vehicle ..........8-30

Fuel

Fuel ..................................8-35

Gasoline Octane ...............8-35

Gasoline Speciﬁcations .....8-35

California Fuel ..................8-35

Additives ...........................8-36

Fuels in Foreign

Countries ........................8-36

Filling the Tank .................8-37

Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ........................8-38

Driving and Operating 8-1

Starting and

Operating Your

Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not

need an elaborate break-in. But it

will perform better in the long

run if you follow these guidelines:

•Do not drive at any one

constant speed, fast or slow,

for the ﬁrst 500 miles (805 km).

Do not make full-throttle

starts. Avoid downshifting

to brake or slow the vehicle.

•Avoid making hard stops for

the ﬁrst 200 miles (322 km) or

so. During this time the new

brake linings are not yet broken

in. Hard stops with new linings

can mean premature wear and

earlier replacement. Follow this

breaking-in guideline every

time you get new brake linings.

Following break-in, engine

speed and load can be gradually

increased.

Ignition Positions

Use the key to turn the ignition

switch to four different positions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the

key to turn in the ignition could

cause damage to the switch or

break the key. Use the correct key,

make sure it is all the way in, and

turn it only with your hand. If the

key cannot be turned by hand, see

your dealer/retailer.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignition

must be in the ON/RUN position

and the regular brake pedal must

be applied.

A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only

position from which you can remove

the key. This locks the steering

wheel, ignition and automatic

transmission.

On vehicles with an automatic

transmission, the shift lever must

be in P (Park) to turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

The ignition switch can bind in the

LOCK/OFF position with your wheels

turned off center. If this happens,

move the steering wheel from

right to left while turning the key to

STEERING UNLOCK/IGNITION

OFF. If this doesn’t work, then the

vehicle needs service.

8-2 Driving and Operating

B (STEERING UNLOCKED/

IGNITION OFF): This position

unlocks the steering wheel.

C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch

stays in this position when the

engine is running. This position can

be used to operate the electrical

accessories, as well as to display

some warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you

leave the key in the ON/RUN position

with the engine off. You may not be

able to start the vehicle if the battery

is allowed to drain for an extended

period of time.

D (START): This position starts

the engine. When the engine starts,

release the key. The ignition switch

will return to ON/RUN for normal

driving. A warning tone will sound

when the driver door is opened and

the key is in the ignition.

Retained Accessory

Power (RAP)

The power windows and mirrors

may be used for up to ﬁve minutes

after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF.

The power windows and mirrors will

not operate after any of the front

doors are opened.

The radio may be used for up to

sixty minutes after the key is turned

to LOCK/OFF.

Starting the Engine

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) or

N (Neutral). The engine will not start

in any other position. To restart

when you are already moving,

use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to

P (Park) if your vehicle is moving.

If you do, you could damage the

transmission. Shift to P (Park)

only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be in Neutral

and the parking brake engaged.

Hold the clutch pedal to the

ﬂoor and start the engine. The

vehicle will not start if the clutch

pedal is not all the way down.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition key to

START. When the engine starts,

let go of the key. The idle speed

will go down as your engine gets

warm. Do not race the engine

immediately after starting it.

Operate the engine and

transmission gently to allow the

oil to warm up and lubricate all

moving parts.

Driving and Operating 8-3

Your vehicle has a

Computer-Controlled Cranking

System. This feature assists in

starting the engine and protects

components. If the ignition key is

turned to the START position,

and then released when the

engine begins cranking, the

engine will continue cranking for a

few seconds or until the vehicle

starts. If the engine does not start

and the key is held in START for

many seconds, cranking will be

stopped after 15 seconds to

prevent cranking motor damage.

To prevent gear damage, this

system also prevents cranking if

the engine is already running.

Engine cranking can be stopped

by turning the ignition switch to

STEERING UNLOCKED/

IGNITION OFF or LOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine for

long periods of time, by returning

the key to the START position

immediately after cranking has

ended, can overheat and damage

the cranking motor, and drain the

battery. Wait at least 15 seconds

between each try, to let the

cranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after

5-10 seconds, especially in very

cold weather (below 0°F or

−18°C), it could be ﬂooded with

too much gasoline. Try pushing

the accelerator pedal all the way

to the ﬂoor and holding it there as

you hold the key in START for up

to a maximum of 15 seconds.

Wait at least 15 seconds between

each try, to let the cranking motor

cool down. When the engine

starts, let go of the key and

accelerator. If the vehicle starts

brieﬂy but then stops again, do

the same thing. This clears the

extra gasoline from the engine.

Do not race the engine

immediately after starting it.

Operate the engine and

transmission gently until the oil

warms up and lubricates all

moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed

to work with the electronics in the

vehicle. If you add electrical parts

or accessories, you could change

the way the engine operates.

Before adding electrical

equipment, check with your

dealer/retailer. If you do not,

the engine might not perform

properly. Any resulting damage

would not be covered by the

vehicle warranty.

Engine Heater

The engine heater can provide

easier starting and better fuel

economy during engine warm-up

in cold weather conditions at or

below −4°F (−20°C). Vehicles with

an engine heater should be plugged

in at least four hours before starting.

8-4 Driving and Operating

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. The engine heater connector is

located in the passenger side

lower front grille. Open the cover

and insert the 110-volt AC

adapter delivered in the vehicles

glove box.

3. Plug the other end of the adapter

into a grounded 110-volt AC

outlet.

{CAUTION

Plugging the cord into an

ungrounded outlet could cause

an electrical shock. Also, the

wrong kind of extension cord

could overheat and cause a

ﬁre. You could be seriously

injured. Plug the cord into a

properly grounded three-prong

110-volt AC outlet. If the cord

will not reach, use a heavy-duty

three-prong extension cord

rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be

sure to unplug both ends of

the adapter and store the adapter

to prevent damage.

The length of time the heater should

remain plugged in depends on

several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer

in the area where you will be parking

the vehicle for the best advice

on this.

Automatic Transmission

Operation

If your vehicle has an automatic

transmission, the shift lever is

located on the console between

the seats.

Your vehicle may also have an

electronic shift position indicator that

displays the position of the shift

lever. This indicator is located above

the trip odometer on the instrument

panel cluster.

Driving and Operating 8-5

PARK (P): This position locks the

front wheels. It is the best position

to use when the engine is started

because your vehicle cannot

move easily.

{CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out of

your vehicle if the shift lever is

not fully in PARK (P) with the

parking brake ﬁrmly set. Your

vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when

the engine is running unless

you have to. If you have left the

engine running, the vehicle can

move suddenly. You or others

could be injured. To be sure

your vehicle will not move, even

when you are on fairly level

ground, always set your parking

brake and move the shift lever to

PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park

on page 8-11.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in

PARK (P) before starting the engine.

Your vehicle has an automatic

transmission shift lock control

system. The regular brakes must be

applied before you can shift from

PARK (P) when the ignition key is in

ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of

PARK (P) while holding the brake

pedal down, see Shifting Out of

Park on page 8-13.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to

back up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving

forward could damage the

transmission. The repairs would

not be covered by the vehicle

warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)

only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and

forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand

without damaging the transmission,

see Rocking Your Vehicle to Get

It Out on page 8-30.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position,

the engine does not connect with the

wheels. To restart while you are

already moving, use NEUTRAL (N)

only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N)

when your vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear while

the engine is running at high

speed is dangerous. Unless

your foot is ﬁrmly on the brake

pedal, the vehicle could move

very rapidly. You could lose

control and hit people or

objects. Do not shift into a

drive gear while the engine is

running at high speed.

8-6 Driving and Operating

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)

or N (Neutral) with the engine

running at high speed may

damage the transmission. The

repairs would not be covered by

the vehicle warranty. Be sure the

engine is not running at high

speed when shifting the vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for

normal driving.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to

start up rather slowly or not shift

gears when you go faster, and you

continue to drive your vehicle that

way, you could damage the

transmission. Have your vehicle

serviced right away.

THIRD (3): This position is also

used for normal driving, however, it

offers more power and lower fuel

economy than DRIVE (D). Here are

some times you might choose

THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D):

•When driving on hilly, winding

roads.

•When going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position gives

you more power but lower fuel

economy. Use SECOND (2) on hills.

It can help control the vehicles speed

as you go down steep mountain

roads, but then you would also want

to use your brakes off and on.

Notice: Driving in FIRST (1) for

more than 25 miles (40 km) or at

speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)

may damage the transmission.

Also, shifting into FIRST (1) at

speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h)

can cause damage. Drive in

THIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead

of FIRST (1).

FIRST (1): This position gives you

even more power but lower fuel

economy than SECOND (2). Use it

on very steep hills, or in deep snow

or mud. If the shift lever is put in

FIRST (1), the transmission does not

shift into ﬁrst gear until the vehicle is

going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires

or holding the vehicle in one

place on a hill using only

the accelerator pedal may

damage the transmission. The

repair will not be covered by your

warranty. If you are stuck, do

not spin the tires. When stopping

on a hill, use the brakes to

hold the vehicle in place.

Driving and Operating 8-7

Winter Driving Mode

This feature helps you accelerate in

slippery driving conditions by using

THIRD (3) gear when you begin to

accelerate from a stopped position.

The winter driving mode button is

located on the center console.

Press once to turn on the winter

driving mode feature. The vehicle

will be in THIRD (3) gear when the

vehicle begins to move. Once the

vehicle is moving, the vehicle will

upshift normally.

The Winter Driving Mode is turned

off by one of the following:

•Pressing the winter driving mode

button again.

•Manually shifting to SECOND (2)

or FIRST (1) gear.

•Turning off the ignition.

This light on the instrument panel

cluster will come on when the winter

driving mode is active.

To protect the transmission,

the winter program turns off

automatically at high transmission

oil temperatures.

Automatic Neutral Idle

The Automatic Neutral Idle shift

function automatically sets the

transmission to NEUTRAL (N) to

reduce fuel consumption when

the vehicle is not moving.

Automatic neutral is activated when

ALL of the following occurs:

•The selector lever is in

DRIVE (D), THIRD (3),

SECOND (2) or FIRST (1) gear.

•The foot brake is pressed.

•The vehicle is stopped.

•The accelerator pedal is not

pressed.

•The transmission ﬂuid

temperature is greater than

0° C (32° F).

•The road is not steeper than 15°.

8-8 Driving and Operating

When you release the brake with the

transmission in gear, you may feel

the transmission shift from Neutral to

Drive automatically. You may also

feel the transmission shift from Drive

to Neutral when the brake is applied.

This is normal operation of the

automatic transmission.

Downhill Grade Assist

When traveling down steep grades

your transmission may automatically

downshift into a lower gear when the

brake is applied. You may feel this

downshift. This performance feature

of your automatic transmission

assists with engine braking to reduce

wear on your brake system. This is

normal operation of the automatic

transmission.

Performance On Demand

This feature allows the driver to

automatically force a downshift,

when traveling at speeds less than

approximately 70 mph (112 km/h),

by fully pressing the accelerator

pedal.

Manual Transmission

Operation

Five-Speed

This is the shift pattern.

Here is how to operate your manual

transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal

and shift into FIRST (1). Then,

slowly let up on the clutch pedal as

you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when

you are going less than 20 mph

(32 km/h). If you have come to a

complete stop and it is hard to shift

into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in

NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the

clutch. Press the clutch pedal back

down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch

pedal as you let up on the

accelerator pedal and shift into

SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on

the clutch pedal as you press the

accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and

FIFTH (5): Shift into THIRD (3),

FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the

same way you do for SECOND (2).

Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as

you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator

pedal and press the brake pedal.

Just before the vehicle stops, press

the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,

and shift to NEUTRAL (N).

NEUTRAL (N): Use this position

when you start or idle your engine.

REVERSE (R): With the vehicle

stationary, wait three seconds after

declutching and pull up on the

button on the selector lever

to engage reverse gear.

Driving and Operating 8-9

If reverse gear does not engage, set

the selector lever in neutral, and

release the clutch pedal. Press the

clutch pedal again and repeat

the gear selection.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving

forward could damage the

transmission. The repairs would

not be covered by the vehicle

warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)

only after the vehicle is stopped.

Also, use REVERSE (R), along

with the parking brake, to park your

vehicle.

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION

If you skip a gear when you

downshift, you could lose

control of your vehicle. You

could injure yourself or others.

Do not shift down more than

one gear at a time when you

downshift.

Parking Brake

The parking brake is located

between the driver and passenger

seats.

To set the parking brake, hold the

brake pedal down and pull up on the

parking brake lever.

To release the parking brake, hold

the brake pedal down. Pull the

parking brake lever up until you

can press the release button. Hold

the release button in as you move

the brake lever all the way down.

8-10 Driving and Operating

A warning chime will sound and

a brake warning light located on the

instrument panel cluster will come

on, if the parking brake is set,

the ignition is on and the vehicle

speed is greater than 5 mph

(8 km/h).

Notice: Driving with the parking

brake on can overheat the

brake system and cause

premature wear or damage

to brake system parts. Make sure

that the parking brake is fully

released and the brake warning

light is off before driving.

Shifting Into Park

{CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out

of your vehicle if the shift lever

is not fully in PARK (P) with the

parking brake ﬁrmly set. Your

vehicle can roll. If you have left

the engine running, the vehicle

can move suddenly. You or

others could be injured. To be

sure your vehicle will not move,

even when you are on fairly level

ground, use the steps that

follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down

with your right foot and set

the parking brake. See Parking

Brake on page 8-10 for more

information.

2. Move the shift lever into

PARK (P) by holding in the button

on the shift lever and pushing the

shift lever all the way toward the

front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to

LOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it

with you. If you can leave

your vehicle with the ignition

key in your hand, your vehicle

is in PARK (P).

Driving and Operating 8-11

Leaving Your Vehicle with the

Engine Running

{CAUTION

It can be dangerous to leave the

vehicle with the engine running.

The vehicle could move

suddenly if the shift lever is not

fully in P (Park) with the parking

brake ﬁrmly set. And, if you

leave the vehicle with the engine

running, it could overheat and

even catch ﬁre. You or others

could be injured. Do not leave

the vehicle with the engine

running.

If you have to leave your vehicle

with the engine running, be sure your

vehicle is in PARK (P) and your

parking brake is ﬁrmly set before you

leave it. After you have moved the

shift lever into PARK (P), hold the

regular brake pedal down. Then, see

if you can move the shift lever away

from PARK (P) without ﬁrst pushing

the button.

If you can, it means that the shift

lever was not fully locked in

PARK (P).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and you

do not shift your transmission into

PARK (P) properly, the weight of the

vehicle may put too much force on

the parking pawl in the transmission.

You may ﬁnd it difficult to pull the

shift lever out of PARK (P).

This is called torque lock. To prevent

torque lock, set the parking brake

and then shift into PARK (P) properly

before you leave the driver’s seat.

To ﬁnd out how, see Shifting Into

Park on page 8-11.

When you are ready to drive, move

the shift lever out of PARK (P) before

you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may

need to have another vehicle

push your vehicle a little uphill to

take some of the pressure from the

parking pawl in the transmission,

so you can pull the shift lever out of

PARK (P).

8-12 Driving and Operating

Shifting Out of Park

This vehicle has an electronic shift

lock release system. The shift

lock release is designed to:

•Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is in

PARK (P) with the shift lever

button fully released.

•Prevent movement of the shift

lever out of PARK (P), unless

the ignition is in the ON/RUN

position and the regular brake

pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is always

functional except in the case of an

uncharged or low voltage (less

than 9 volt) battery.

If your vehicle has an uncharged

battery or a battery with low voltage,

try charging or jump starting the

battery. See Jump Starting on

page 9-68 for more information.

To shift out of PARK (P) use the

following sequence:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the

desired position.

If you still are unable to shift out of

PARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift lever

button.

2. While holding down the brake

pedal, press the shift lever

button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the

desired position.

If you still cannot move the shift

lever from PARK (P), consult your

dealer/retailer or a professional

towing service.

Parking the Vehicle

Before you get out of your vehicle,

move the shift lever into FIRST (1) or

REVERSE (R) and ﬁrmly apply the

parking brake. Once the shift lever

has been placed into FIRST (1) or

REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal

pressed in, you can turn the ignition

off and release the clutch.

Parking Over Things

That Burn

{CAUTION

Things that can burn could

touch hot exhaust parts under

your vehicle and ignite. Do not

park over papers, leaves, dry

grass, or other things that

can burn.

Driving and Operating 8-13

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION

Engine exhaust can kill. It

contains the gas carbon

monoxide (CO), which you

cannot see or smell. It can cause

unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming

in if:

•The exhaust system sounds

strange or different.

•Your vehicle gets rusty

underneath.

•Your vehicle was damaged in

a collision.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

•Your vehicle was damaged

when driving over high

points on the road or over

road debris.

•Repairs were not done

correctly.

•Your vehicle or the exhaust

system has been modiﬁed

improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is

coming into your vehicle:

•Drive it only with all the

windows down to blow out

any CO.

•Have your vehicle ﬁxed

immediately.

Running the Vehicle

While Parked

It is better not to park with the

engine running. But if you ever have

to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION

Idling the engine with the

climate control system off

could allow dangerous exhaust

into your vehicle. See the

earlier caution under Engine

Exhaust on page 8-14.

(Continued)

8-14 Driving and Operating

CAUTION (Continued)

Also, idling in a closed-in place

can let deadly carbon monoxide

(CO) into your vehicle even if the

climate control fan is at the

highest setting. One place

this can happen is a garage.

Exhaust — with CO — can come

in easily. NEVER park in a

garage with the engine running.

Also see “If You Are Caught in a

Blizzard” under Winter Driving

on page 8-27.

{CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out

of your vehicle if the shift lever

is not fully in PARK (P) with the

parking brake ﬁrmly set. Your

vehicle can roll. Do not leave

your vehicle when the engine

is running unless you have to.

If you have left the engine

running, the vehicle can move

suddenly. You or others could

be injured. To be sure your

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

vehicle will not move, even

when you are on fairly level

ground, always set the parking

brake and move the shift lever

to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure

your vehicle will not move. See

Shifting Into Park on page 8-11.

Driving and Operating 8-15

Driving Your Vehicle

Defensive Driving

Defensive driving means “always

expect the unexpected.” The

ﬁrst step in driving defensively is to

wear your safety belt, see Safety

Belts on page 1-8.

{CAUTION

Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, and

other drivers) are going to be

careless and make mistakes.

Anticipate what they might do

and be ready. In addition:

•Allow enough following

distance between you and

the driver in front of you.

•Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Driver distraction can cause

collisions resulting in injury or

possible death. These simple

defensive driving techniques

could save your life.

Drunk Driving

{CAUTION

Drinking and then driving is

very dangerous. Your reﬂexes,

perceptions, attentiveness, and

judgment can be affected by

even a small amount of alcohol.

You can have a serious — or

even fatal — collision if you

drive after drinking. Do not

drink and drive or ride with a

driver who has been drinking.

Ride home in a cab; or if you

are with a group, designate a

driver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated with

drinking and driving is a global

tragedy.

Alcohol affects four things that

anyone needs to drive a vehicle:

judgment, muscular coordination,

vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show that

almost 40 percent of all motor

vehicle-related deaths involve

alcohol. In most cases, these deaths

are the result of someone who was

drinking and driving. In recent years,

more than 17,000 annual motor

vehicle-related deaths have been

associated with the use of alcohol,

with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is against

the law in every U.S. state to drink

alcohol. There are good medical,

psychological, and developmental

reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the

leading highway safety problem

is for people never to drink alcohol

and then drive.

8-16 Driving and Operating

Medical research shows that alcohol

in a person’s system can make crash

injuries worse, especially injuries

to the brain, spinal cord, or heart.

This means that when anyone who

has been drinking — driver or

passenger — is in a crash, that

person’s chance of being killed or

permanently disabled is higher than

if the person had not been drinking.

Control of a Vehicle

The following three systems help

to control your vehicle while

driving — brakes, steering, and

accelerator. At times, as when

driving on snow or ice, it is easy to

ask more of those control systems

than the tires and road can provide.

Meaning, you can lose control of

your vehicle.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer

accessories can affect your vehicle’s

performance. See Accessories

and Modiﬁcations on page 9-3.

Braking

See Brake System Warning Light on

page 4-17.

Braking action involves perception

time and reaction time. First, you

have to decide to push on the brake

pedal. That is perception time. Then

you have to bring up your foot and

do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about

three-fourths of a second. But that

is only an average. It might be

less with one driver and as long

as two or three seconds or

more with another. Age, physical

condition, alertness, coordination,

and eyesight all play a part.

So do alcohol, drugs, and

frustration. But even in three-fourths

of a second, a vehicle moving at

60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet

(20 m). That could be a lot of

distance in an emergency, so

keeping enough space between

your vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping

distances vary greatly with the

surface of the road, whether it is

pavement or gravel; the condition of

the road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy;

tire tread; the condition of the brakes;

the weight of the vehicle; and the

amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy

braking. Some people drive in

spurts — heavy acceleration

followed by heavy braking — rather

than keeping pace with traffic. This

is a mistake. The brakes might not

have time to cool between hard

stops. The brakes will wear out much

faster if you do a lot of heavy braking.

If you keep pace with the traffic and

allow realistic following distances,

you will eliminate a lot of

unnecessary braking. That means

better braking and longer brake life.

Driving and Operating 8-17

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops

while you are driving, brake normally

but do not pump the brakes. If you

do, the pedal could get harder to

push down. If the engine stops, you

will still have some power brake

assist. But you will use it when you

brake. Once the power assist is used

up, it can take longer to stop and the

brake pedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer

accessories can affect your vehicle’s

performance. See Accessories

and Modiﬁcations on page 9-3.

Antilock Brake

System (ABS)

Your vehicle has the Antilock

Brake System (ABS), an advanced

electronic braking system that

will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine and

begin to drive away, ABS will check

itself. You might hear a momentary

motor or clicking noise while this

test is going on, and you might even

notice that the brake pedal moves a

little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS,

this warning light will stay on.

See Antilock Brake System (ABS)

Warning Light on page 4-18.

Let us say the road is wet and you

are driving safely. Suddenly, an

animal jumps out in front of you.

You slam on the brakes and

continue braking. Here is what

happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels

are slowing down. If one of

the wheels is about to stop rolling,

the computer will separately

work the brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake

pressure faster than any driver could.

The computer is programmed to

make the most of available tire and

road conditions. This can help you

steer around the obstacle while

braking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps

receiving updates on wheel speed

and controls braking pressure

accordingly.

8-18 Driving and Operating

Remember: ABS does not change

the time you need to get your foot

up to the brake pedal or always

decrease stopping distance. If you

get too close to the vehicle in front of

you, you will not have time to apply

the brakes if that vehicle suddenly

slows or stops. Always leave enough

room up ahead to stop, even though

you have ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just hold

the brake pedal down ﬁrmly and

let antilock work for you. You might

hear the antilock pump or motor

operate, and feel the brake

pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

With ABS, you can steer and

brake at the same time. In many

emergencies, steering can help

you more than even the very best

braking.

StabiliTrak

System

Your vehicle may have StabiliTrak

which combines antilock brake,

traction and stability control systems

and helps the driver maintain

directional control of the vehicle

in most driving conditions.

When you ﬁrst start your vehicle and

begin to drive away, the system

performs several diagnostic checks

to ensure there are no problems.

You may hear or feel the system

working. This is normal and does not

mean there is a problem with your

vehicle. The system should initialize

before the vehicle reaches 20 mph

(32 km/h).

The system monitors vehicle

movements, and helps the driver

maintain control of the vehicle in

most driving situations. When the

vehicle’s stability is affected the

engine output is reduced, and the

brakes are applied to individual

wheels.

When you turn the ignition on,

this light on the instrument panel

cluster will come on for a few

seconds, then go out when the

system is ready.

You may also feel or hear the

system working; this is normal.

StabiliTrak is automatically enabled

whenever you start your vehicle.

To assist the driver with vehicle

directional control, especially in

slippery road conditions, you should

always leave the system on. But, you

can turn it off if you ever need to.

Driving and Operating 8-19

It is recommended to leave the

system on for normal driving

conditions, but it may be necessary

to turn the system off if your vehicle

is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,

and you want to “rock” your vehicle

to attempt to free it. It may also be

necessary to turn off the system

when driving in extreme off-road

conditions where high wheel spin

is required. See If Your Vehicle is

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow

on page 8-29.

StabiliTrak may also turn off

automatically if it determines that a

problem exists with the system.

The light on the instrument panel

cluster will be on solid to warn

the driver that StabiliTrak is disabled

and requires service. If the problem

does not clear after restarting

the vehicle, you should see your

dealer/retailer for service.

The gswitch is located on the

instrument panel below the Driver

Information Center (DIC).

To turn off StabiliTrak, press and

hold the gswitch until the light in the

switch illuminates.

To turn StabiliTrak on again, press

the gswitch again or restart the

vehicle.

A light in the switch should come

on brieﬂy when the ignition key

is turned to ON/RUN as a check

to let you know that the light

is working.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer

accessories can affect your vehicle’s

performance. See Accessories

and Modiﬁcations on page 9-3 for

more information.

Steering

If the engine stalls while you

are driving, the power steering assist

system should continue to operate

until you are able to stop the

vehicle. If you lose power steering

assist because the power steering

system is not functioning, you

can steer, but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in

either direction several times until it

stops, or hold the steering wheel in

the stopped position for an extended

amount of time, you may notice a

reduced amount of power steering

assist. The normal amount of power

steering assist should return shortly

after a few normal steering

movements.

The power steering system does not

require regular maintenance. If you

suspect steering system problems

and/or the Service Vehicle Soon light

comes on, contact your dealer/

retailer for service repairs.

8-20 Driving and Operating

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at a

reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control”

accidents mentioned on the news

happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner,

each of us is subject to the same

laws of physics when driving on

curves. The traction of the tires

against the road surface makes it

possible for the vehicle to change its

path when you turn the front wheels.

If there is no traction, inertia will

keep the vehicle going in the same

direction. If you have ever tried to

steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will

understand this.

Traction in a curve depends on

the condition of the tires and

the road surface, the angle at which

the curve is banked, and your

speed. While in a curve, speed is

the one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering

through a sharp curve. Then

you suddenly accelerate. Both

control systems — steering

and acceleration — have to do

their work where the tires meet

the road. Adding the sudden

acceleration can demand too much

of those places. You can lose

control. See StabiliTrak

System

on page 8-19.

What should you do if this ever

happens? Ease up on the brake

or accelerator pedal, steer the

vehicle the way you want it to go,

and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn

that you should adjust your speed.

Of course, the posted speeds are

based on good weather and road

conditions. Under less favorable

conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce speed when

approaching a curve, do it before

you enter the curve, while the front

wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust the speed so you can

drive through the curve. Maintain

a reasonable, steady speed. Wait

to accelerate until you are out of the

curve, and then accelerate gently

into the straightaway.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer

accessories can affect your vehicle’s

performance. See Accessories

and Modiﬁcations on page 9-3.

Driving and Operating 8-21

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering can

be more effective than braking. For

example, you come over a hill and

ﬁnd a truck stopped in your lane, or a

car suddenly pulls out from nowhere,

or a child darts out from between

parked cars and stops right in front of

you. You can avoid these problems

by braking — if you can stop in time.

But sometimes you cannot; there is

not room. That is the time for evasive

action — steering around the

problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well

in emergencies like these. First

apply the brakes. See Braking on

page 8-17. It is better to remove

as much speed as you can from a

possible collision. Then steer around

the problem, to the left or right

depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires

close attention and a quick decision.

If you are holding the steering wheel

at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock

positions, you can turn it a full

180 degrees very quickly without

removing either hand. But you have

to act fast, steer quickly, and just as

quickly straighten the wheel once

you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency

situations are always possible is a

good reason to practice defensive

driving at all times and wear

safety belts properly.

Off-Road Recovery

Your vehicle’s right wheels can drop

off the edge of a road onto the

shoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only

slightly below the pavement,

recovery should be fairly easy.

Ease off the accelerator and then,

if there is nothing in the way,

steer so that your vehicle straddles

the edge of the pavement.

8-22 Driving and Operating

Turn the steering wheel 3 to

5 inches (about one-eighth turn)

until the right front tire contacts the

pavement edge. Then turn the

steering wheel to go straight down

the roadway.

Passing

Passing another vehicle on a

two-lane road can be dangerous.

To reduce the risk of danger

while passing:

•Look down the road, to the sides,

and to crossroads for situations

that might affect a successful

pass. If in doubt, wait.

•Watch for traffic signs, pavement

markings, and lines that could

indicate a turn or an intersection.

Never cross a solid or

double-solid line on your

side of the lane.

•Do not get too close to the vehicle

you want to pass. Doing so can

reduce your visibility.

•Wait your turn to pass a slow

vehicle.

•When you are being passed, ease

to the right.

Loss of Control

Let us review what driving experts

say about what happens when

the three control systems — brakes,

steering, and acceleration — do

not have enough friction where the

tires meet the road to do what

the driver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.

Keep trying to steer and constantly

seek an escape route or area of

less danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control of

the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid

most skids by taking reasonable care

suited to existing conditions, and by

not overdriving those conditions.

But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond

to your vehicle’s three control

systems. In the braking skid, the

wheels are not rolling. In the steering

or cornering skid, too much speed or

steering in a curve causes tires to

slip and lose cornering force. And

in the acceleration skid, too much

throttle causes the driving wheels

to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled

by easing your foot off of the

accelerator pedal.

Driving and Operating 8-23

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease

your foot off the accelerator pedal

and quickly steer the way you want

the vehicle to go. If you start steering

quickly enough, your vehicle may

straighten out. Always be ready for a

second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when

water, snow, ice, gravel, or other

material is on the road. For safety,

you want to slow down and

adjust your driving to these

conditions. It is important to slow

down on slippery surfaces because

stopping distance is longer and

vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with

reduced traction, try your best to

avoid sudden steering, acceleration,

or braking, including reducing

vehicle speed by shifting to a lower

gear. Any sudden changes could

cause the tires to slide. You

might not realize the surface is

slippery until your vehicle is

skidding. Learn to recognize warning

clues — such as enough water,

ice, or packed snow on the road to

make a mirrored surface — and

slow down when you have any

doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock Brake

System (ABS) helps avoid only the

braking skid.

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous

than day driving because some

drivers are likely to be impaired — by

alcohol or drugs, with night vision

problems, or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

•Drive defensively.

•Do not drink and drive.

•Reduce headlamp glare by

adjusting the inside rearview

mirror.

•Slow down and keep more space

between you and other vehicles

because headlamps can only

light up so much road ahead.

•Watch for animals.

•When tired, pull off the road.

•Do not wear sunglasses.

•Avoid staring directly into

approaching headlamps.

•Keep the windshield and all glass

on your vehicle clean — inside

and out.

•Keep your eyes moving,

especially during turns or curves.

No one can see as well at night as

in the daytime. But, as we get

older, these differences increase.

A 50-year-old driver might need

at least twice as much light to see

the same thing at night as a

20-year-old.

8-24 Driving and Operating

Driving in Rain and on

Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can reduce

vehicle traction and affect your

ability to stop and accelerate.

Always drive slower in these types

of driving conditions and avoid

driving through large puddles and

deep-standing or ﬂowing water.

{CAUTION

Wet brakes can cause crashes.

They might not work as well in

a quick stop and could cause

pulling to one side. You could

lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large

puddle of water or a car/vehicle

wash, lightly apply the brake

pedal until the brakes work

normally.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water

creates strong forces. Driving

through ﬂowing water could

cause your vehicle to be

carried away. If this happens,

you and other vehicle

occupants could drown. Do not

ignore police warnings and be

very cautious about trying to

drive through ﬂowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water

can build up under your vehicle’s

tires so they actually ride on the

water. This can happen if the road is

wet enough and you are going fast

enough. When your vehicle is

hydroplaning, it has little or no

contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule about

hydroplaning. The best advice is

to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wet

weather driving tips include:

•Allow extra following distance.

•Pass with caution.

•Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.

•Keep the windshield washer ﬂuid

reservoir ﬁlled.

•Have good tires with proper tread

depth. See Tires on page 9-38.

•Turn off cruise control, if

equipped.

Driving and Operating 8-25

Before Leaving on a

Long Trip

To prepare your vehicle for a long

trip, consider having it serviced by

your dealer/retailer before departing.

Things to check on your own

include:

•Windshield Washer Fluid:

Reservoir full? Windows

clean — inside and outside?

•Wiper Blades: In good shape?

•Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All

levels checked?

•Lamps: Do they all work and are

lenses clean?

•Tires: Are treads good? Are tires

inﬂated to recommended

pressure?

•Weather and Maps: Safe to

travel? Have up-to-date maps?

Highway Hypnosis

Always be alert and pay attention

to your surroundings while driving.

If you become tired or sleepy, ﬁnd

a safe place to park your vehicle

and rest.

Other driving tips include:

•Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

•Keep interior temperature cool.

•Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.

•Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or through

mountains is different than driving

on ﬂat or rolling terrain. Tips for

driving in these conditions include:

•Keep the vehicle serviced

and in good shape.

•Check all ﬂuid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, and

transmission.

•Going down steep or long hills,

shift to a lower gear.

{CAUTION

If you do not shift down, the

brakes could get so hot that

they would not work well. You

would then have poor braking

or even none going down a hill.

You could crash. Shift down to

let the engine assist the brakes

on a steep downhill slope.

8-26 Driving and Operating

{CAUTION

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)

or with the ignition off is

dangerous. The brakes will

have to do all the work of

slowing down and they could

get so hot that they would not

work well. You would then have

poor braking or even none

going down a hill. You could

crash. Always have the engine

running and the vehicle in gear

when going downhill.

•Stay in your own lane. Do not

swing wide or cut across the

center of the road. Drive at

speeds that let you stay in your

own lane.

•Top of hills: Be alert — something

could be in your lane (stalled car,

accident).

•Pay attention to special road

signs (falling rocks area, winding

roads, long grades, passing or

no-passing zones) and take

appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter

driving:

•Have your vehicle in good shape

for winter.

•You might want to put winter

emergency supplies in your

vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small

brush or broom, a supply of

windshield washer ﬂuid, a rag, some

winter outer clothing, a small shovel,

a ﬂashlight, a red cloth, and reﬂective

warning triangles. And, if you will be

driving under severe conditions,

include a small bag of sand, a piece

of old carpet, or a couple of burlap

bags to help provide traction. Be sure

you properly secure these items in

your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 9-38.

Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places

where the tires meet the road

probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice

between the tires and the road, you

can have a very slippery situation.

You have a lot less traction, or grip,

and need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet

ice. Very cold snow or ice can be

slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice

can be even more trouble because it

can offer the least traction of all.

Driving and Operating 8-27

You can get wet ice when it is about

freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing

rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving

on wet ice until salt and sand crews

can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth

ice, packed, blowing, or loose

snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to

break the fragile traction. If you

accelerate too fast, the drive wheels

will spin and polish the surface

under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)

improves your vehicle’s stability

when you make a hard stop

on a slippery road. Even though you

have ABS, begin stopping sooner

than you would on dry pavement.

See Antilock Brake System

(ABS) on page 8-18.

•Allow greater following distance

on any slippery road.

•Watch for slippery spots. The

road might be ﬁne until you hit

a spot that is covered with ice.

On an otherwise clear road, ice

patches can appear in shaded

areas where the sun cannot

reach, such as around clumps of

trees, behind buildings, or under

bridges. Sometimes the surface

of a curve or an overpass can

remain icy when the surrounding

roads are clear. If you see a patch

of ice ahead of you, brake before

you are on it. Try not to brake

while you are actually on the ice,

and avoid sudden steering

maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy

snow, you could be in a serious

situation. You should probably

stay with your vehicle unless you

know for sure that you are near

help and you can hike through the

snow. Here are some things to do

to summon help and keep yourself

and your passengers safe:

•Turn on the hazard warning

ﬂashers.

•Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to

alert police that you have been

stopped by the snow.

•Put on extra clothing or wrap a

blanket around you. If you do not

have blankets or extra clothing,

make body insulators from

newspapers, burlap bags, rags,

ﬂoor mats — anything you can

wrap around yourself or tuck

under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep

warm, but be careful.

8-28 Driving and Operating

{CAUTION

Snow can trap exhaust gases

under your vehicle. This can

cause deadly CO (carbon

monoxide) gas to get inside.

CO could overcome you and

kill you. You cannot see it or

smell it, so you might not know

it is in your vehicle. Clear away

snow from around the base of

your vehicle, especially any

that is blocking the exhaust

pipe. And check around again

from time to time to be sure

snow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on

the side of the vehicle that is

away from the wind. This will

help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you

must. This saves fuel. When you run

the engine, make it go a little faster

than just idle. That is, push the

accelerator slightly. This uses less

fuel for the heat that you get and it

keeps the battery charged. You will

need a well-charged battery to

restart the vehicle, and possibly

for signaling later on with the

headlamps. Let the heater run

for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close

the window almost all the way to

preserve the heat. Start the engine

again and repeat this only when

you feel really uncomfortable from

the cold. But do it as little as

possible. Preserve the fuel as long

as you can. To help keep warm,

you can get out of the vehicle and

do some fairly vigorous exercises

every half hour or so until help

comes.

If Your Vehicle is

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,

or Snow

Slowly and cautiously spin the

wheels to free the vehicle when

stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It

Out on page 8-30.

{CAUTION

If you let your vehicle’s tires

spin at high speed, they can

explode, and you or others

could be injured. The vehicle

can overheat, causing an

engine compartment ﬁre or

other damage. Spin the wheels

as little as possible and avoid

going above 35 mph (55 km/h)

as shown on the speedometer.

For information about using tire

chains on the vehicle, see Tire

Chains on page 9-59.

Driving and Operating 8-29

Rocking Your Vehicle to

Get It Out

First, turn the steering wheel left and

right to clear the area around the

front wheels. Turn off any stability

system. See StabiliTrak

System on

page 8-19. Then shift back and forth

between REVERSE (R) and a

forward gear, or with a manual

transmission, between FIRST (1) or

SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R),

spinning the wheels as little as

possible. To prevent transmission

wear, wait until the wheels stop

spinning before shifting gears.

Release the accelerator pedal

while you shift, and press lightly

on the accelerator pedal when

the transmission is in gear. By slowly

spinning the wheels in the forward

and reverse directions, you will

cause a rocking motion that could

free your vehicle. If that does not get

your vehicle out after a few tries, it

might need to be towed out. If your

vehicle does need to be towed out,

see Towing Your Vehicle on

page 9-72.

Loading the Vehicle

It is very important to know how

much weight your vehicle can

carry. This weight is called the

vehicle capacity weight and

includes the weight of all

occupants, cargo and all

nonfactory-installed options.

Two labels on your vehicle

show how much weight it may

properly carry, the Tire and

Loading Information label and

the Certiﬁcation label.

8-30 Driving and Operating

{CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle any

heavier than the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR), or either the

maximum front or rear

Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR). If you do, parts on

the vehicle can break, and it

can change the way your

vehicle handles. These

could cause you to lose

control and crash. Also,

overloading can shorten

the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information

Label

A vehicle speciﬁc Tire and

Loading Information label

is attached to the vehicle’s

center pillar (B-pillar). With the

driver’s door open, you will

ﬁnd the label attached below

the door lock post. The Tire

and Loading Information label

shows the number of occupant

seating positions (A), and

the maximum vehicle capacity

weight (B) in kilograms and

pounds.

The Tire and Loading

Information label also shows the

tire size of the original equipment

tires (C) and the recommended

cold tire inﬂation pressures (D).

For more information on tires and

inﬂation see Tires on page 9-38

and Inﬂation - Tire Pressure on

page 9-46.

There is also important loading

information on the Certiﬁcation

label. It tells you the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

and the Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) for the front and

rear axle; see “Certiﬁcation

Label” later in this section.

Label Example

Driving and Operating 8-31

Steps for Determining Correct

Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never

exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”

on your vehicle placard.

2. Determine the combined

weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding

in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting ﬁgure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For

example, if the “XXX” amount

equals 1400 lbs and there will

be ﬁve 150 lb passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage

load capacity is 650 lbs

(1400 −750 (5 x 150) =

650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined

weight of luggage and

cargo being loaded on the

vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing

a trailer, the load from your

trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how

this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle.

The vehicle is neither designed

nor intended to tow a trailer.

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for

Example 1 =1,000 lbs

(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) ×2=300 lbs

(136 kg).

C. Available Occupant and

Cargo Weight =700 lbs

(317 kg).

Example 1

8-32 Driving and Operating

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for

Example 2 =1,000 lbs

(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) ×5=750 lbs

(340 kg).

C. Available Cargo

Weight =250 lbs (113 kg).

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for

Example 3 =1,000 lbs

(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant

Weight 200 lbs

(91 kg) ×5=1,000 lbs

(453 kg).

C. Available Cargo

Weight =0 lbs (0 kg).

Refer to the vehicle’s Tire and

Loading Information label for

speciﬁc information about the

vehicle’s capacity weight and

seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,

and cargo should never exceed

the vehicle’s capacity weight.

Certiﬁcation Label

A vehicle speciﬁc Certiﬁcation

label, found on the rear edge

of the driver’s door, tells you

the gross weight capacity of

the vehicle, called the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

Example 2 Example 3

Label Example

Driving and Operating 8-33

The GVWR includes the weight

of the vehicle, all occupants,

fuel, and cargo. Never exceed

the GVWR for your vehicle,

or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) for either the front or

rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy

load, you should spread it out.

See “Steps for Determining

Correct Load Limit” earlier in

this section.

{CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle any

heavier than the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR), or either the

maximum front or rear Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If you do, parts on the

vehicle can break, and it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. These could cause

you to lose control and

crash. Also, overloading

can shorten the life of the

vehicle.

If you put things inside your

vehicle — like suitcases,

tools, packages, or anything

else — they will go as fast as

the vehicle goes. If you have

to stop or turn quickly, or if

there is a crash, they will

keep going.

{CAUTION

Things you put inside the

vehicle can strike and injure

people in a sudden stop or

turn, or in a crash.

•Put things in the trunk of

your vehicle. In a trunk,

put them as far forward as

you can. Try to spread the

weight evenly.

•Never stack heavier

things, like suitcases,

inside the vehicle so that

some of them are above

the tops of the seats.

•Do not leave an

unsecured child restraint

in the vehicle.

•When you carry

something inside the

vehicle, secure it

whenever you can.

•Do not leave a seat folded

down unless you need to.

8-34 Driving and Operating

Fuel

Use of the recommended fuel

is an important part of the proper

maintenance of your vehicle. To help

keep the engine clean and maintain

optimum vehicle performance, we

recommend the use of gasoline

advertised as TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline.

Gasoline Octane

Use regular unleaded gasoline with

a posted octane rating of 87 or

higher. If the octane rating is less

than 87, you might notice an audible

knocking noise when you drive,

commonly referred to as spark

knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline

rated at 87 octane or higher as

soon as possible. If you are using

gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher

and you hear heavy knocking, the

engine needs service.

Gasoline Speciﬁcations

At a minimum, gasoline should

meet ASTM speciﬁcation

D 4814 in the United States or

CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.

Some gasolines contain an

octane-enhancing additive called

methylcyclopentadienyl manganese

tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend

against the use of gasolines

containing MMT. See Additives on

page 8-36 for additional information.

California Fuel

If your vehicle is certiﬁed to meet

California Emissions Standards, it is

designed to operate on fuels that

meet California speciﬁcations. See

the underhood emission control

label. If this fuel is not available in

states adopting California emissions

standards, your vehicle will operate

satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal

speciﬁcations, but emission control

system performance might be

affected. The malfunction indicator

lamp could turn on and your vehicle

might fail a smog-check test. See

Malfunction Indicator Lamp on

page 4-20. If this occurs, return to

your authorized dealer/retailer for

diagnosis. If it is determined that the

condition is caused by the type of

fuel used, repairs might not be

covered by the vehicle warranty.

Driving and Operating 8-35

Additives

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines

in the United States are now required

to contain additives that help prevent

engine and fuel system deposits

from forming, allowing the emission

control system to work properly.

In most cases, you should not have

to add anything to the fuel. However,

some gasolines contain only the

minimum amount of additive required

to meet U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency regulations.

To help keep fuel injectors and intake

valves clean, or if your vehicle

experiences problems due to dirty

injectors or valves, look for gasoline

that is advertised as TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline. Also, your

dealer/retailer has additives that

will help correct and prevent most

deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,

such as ethers and ethanol, and

reformulated gasolines might

be available in your area.

We recommend that you use these

gasolines, if they comply with the

speciﬁcations described earlier.

However, E85 (85% ethanol) and

other fuels containing more than

10% ethanol must not be used in

vehicles that were not designed for

those fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not

designed for fuel that contains

methanol. Do not use fuel

containing methanol. It can

corrode metal parts in the fuel

system and also damage plastic

and rubber parts. That damage

would not be covered under your

warranty.

Some gasolines that are

not reformulated for low

emissions can contain an

octane-enhancing additive called

methylcyclopentadienyl manganese

tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant

where you buy gasoline whether the

fuel contains MMT. We recommend

against the use of such gasolines.

Fuels containing MMT can reduce

the life of spark plugs and the

performance of the emission control

system could be affected. The

malfunction indicator lamp might turn

on. If this occurs, return to your

dealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign

Countries

If you plan on driving in another

country outside the United States or

Canada, the proper fuel might be

hard to ﬁnd. Never use leaded

gasoline or any other fuel not

recommended in the previous text

on fuel. Costly repairs caused

by use of improper fuel would not

be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask

an auto club, or contact a major oil

company that does business in

the country where you will be

driving.

8-36 Driving and Operating

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION

Fuel vapor burns violently and a

fuel ﬁre can cause bad injuries.

To help avoid injuries to you and

others, read and follow all the

instructions on the pump island.

Turn off your engine when you

are refueling. Do not smoke if

you are near fuel or refueling

your vehicle. Do not use cellular

phones. Keep sparks, ﬂames,

and smoking materials away

from fuel. Do not leave the fuel

pump unattended when

refueling your vehicle. This is

against the law in some places.

Do not re-enter the vehicle while

pumping fuel. Keep children

away from the fuel pump; never

let children pump fuel.

The fuel cap is located behind a

hinged fuel door on the passenger

side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it

slowly counterclockwise.

The fuel cap has a spring in it,

if the cap is released too soon it

will spring back.

{CAUTION

Fuel can spray out on you if

you open the fuel cap too

quickly. If you spill fuel and

then something ignites it, you

could be badly burned. This

spray can happen if your tank

is nearly full, and is more likely

in hot weather. Open the fuel

cap slowly and wait for any

hiss noise to stop. Then

unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not

top off or overﬁll the tank and wait a

few seconds after you have ﬁnished

pumping before removing the nozzle.

Clean fuel from painted surfaces as

soon as possible. See Exterior

Cleaning on page 9-75.

Driving and Operating 8-37

When replacing the fuel cap, turn

it clockwise until it clicks. Make

sure the cap is fully installed. The

diagnostic system can determine if

the fuel cap has been left off or

improperly installed. This would

allow fuel to evaporate into

the atmosphere. See Malfunction

Indicator Lamp on page 4-20.

{CAUTION

If a ﬁre starts while you are

refueling, do not remove the

nozzle. Shut off the ﬂow of fuel

by shutting off the pump or by

notifying the station attendant.

Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel

cap, be sure to get the right type.

Your dealer/retailer can get one for

you. If you get the wrong type, it

may not ﬁt properly. This may

cause your malfunction indicator

lamp to light and may damage

your fuel tank and emissions

system. See Malfunction Indicator

Lamp on page 4-20.

Filling a Portable Fuel

Container

{CAUTION

Never ﬁll a portable fuel

container while it is in your

vehicle. Static electricity

discharge from the container

can ignite the fuel vapor.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

You can be badly burned and

your vehicle damaged if this

occurs. To help avoid injury to

you and others:

•Dispense fuel only into

approved containers.

•Do not ﬁll a container while

it is inside a vehicle, in a

vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,

or on any surface other than

the ground.

•Bring the ﬁll nozzle in

contact with the inside of the

ﬁll opening before operating

the nozzle. Contact should be

maintained until the ﬁlling is

complete.

•Do not smoke while

pumping fuel.

•Do not use a cellular phone

while pumping fuel.

8-38 Driving and Operating

Vehicle Service

and Care

Service

Service ...............................9-2

Accessories and

Modiﬁcations .....................9-3

California Proposition 65

Warning ............................9-3

California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements .....9-3

Doing Your Own

Service Work ....................9-4

Adding Equipment to the

Outside of the Vehicle ......9-4

Owner Checks

Owner Checks ....................9-5

Hood Release .....................9-5

Engine Compartment

Overview ...........................9-6

Engine Oil ..........................9-7

Engine Oil Life System .......9-9

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....9-11

Automatic Transmission

Fluid ................................9-12

Manual Transmission

Fluid ................................9-12

Hydraulic Clutch ................9-12

Engine Coolant .................9-12

Pressure Cap ....................9-15

Engine Overheating ...........9-15

Cooling System .................9-16

Power Steering Fluid .........9-20

Windshield Washer Fluid ....9-20

Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ...................9-21

Brakes ..............................9-22

Battery ..............................9-25

Headlamp Aiming

Headlamp Aiming ..............9-26

Bulb Replacement

Bulb Replacement .............9-28

Halogen Bulbs ..................9-28

Front Turn Signal Lamps ...9-28

Taillamps

(Five-Door Hatchback) .....9-29

Taillamps

(Three-Door Hatchback) ...9-30

License Plate Lamp ..........9-32

Replacement Bulbs ...........9-33

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical

Equipment .......................9-33

Headlamp Wiring ..............9-33

Windshield Wiper Fuses ....9-34

Power Windows and

Other Power Options .......9-34

Fuses ...............................9-34

Engine Compartment

Fuse Block ......................9-34

Rear Compartment

Fuse Block ......................9-36

Tires

Tires .................................9-38

Winter Tires ......................9-39

Tire Sidewall Labeling .......9-40

Tire Terminology and

Deﬁnitions .......................9-43

Inﬂation - Tire Pressure ....9-46

High-Speed Operation .......9-47

Tire Pressure Monitor

System ............................9-48

Tire Pressure Monitor

Operation ........................9-50

Tire Inspection and

Rotation ..........................9-51

When It Is Time for

New Tires .......................9-53

Vehicle Service and Care 9-1

Buying New Tires .............9-54

Different Size Tires

and Wheels .....................9-55

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ...........................9-56

Wheel Alignment and

Tire Balance ....................9-58

Wheel Replacement ..........9-58

Tire Chains .......................9-59

Tire Changing

If a Tire Goes Flat ............9-60

Changing a Flat Tire .........9-60

Removing the Spare

Tire and Tools .................9-61

Removing the Flat Tire

and Installing the

Spare Tire .......................9-62

Storing a Flat or Spare

Tire and Tools .................9-66

Compact Spare Tire ..........9-67

Jump Starting

Jump Starting ...................9-68

Towing

Towing Your Vehicle .........9-72

Recreational Vehicle

Towing ............................9-72

Towing a Trailer ................9-72

Appearance Care

Interior Cleaning ................9-72

Exterior Cleaning ..............9-75

Sheet Metal Damage ........9-78

Finish Damage ..................9-79

Underbody Maintenance ....9-79

Chemical Paint Spotting ....9-79

Vehicle Care/Appearance

Materials .........................9-80

Service

For service and parts needs,

visit your dealer/retailer. You will

receive genuine Saturn parts

and Saturn-trained and supported

service people.

Genuine Saturn parts have one of

these marks.

9-2 Vehicle Service and Care

Accessories and

Modiﬁcations

When non-dealer/non-retailer

accessories are added to your

vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s

performance and safety, including

such things as, airbags, braking,

stability, ride and handling,

emissions systems, aerodynamics,

durability, and electronic systems like

antilock brakes, traction control and

stability control. Some of these

accessories could even cause

malfunction or damage not covered

by warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to

complement and function with other

systems on your vehicle. Your GM

dealer/retailer can accessorize

your vehicle using genuine GM

Accessories. When you go to your

GM dealer/retailer and ask for

GM Accessories, you will know that

GM-trained and supported service

technicians will perform the work

using genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to

Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on

page 1-35.

California Proposition 65

Warning

Most motor vehicles, including this

one, contain and/or emit chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. Engine

exhaust, many parts and systems

(including some inside the vehicle),

many ﬂuids, and some component

wear by-products contain and/or

emit these chemicals.

California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements

Certain types of automotive

applications, such as airbag

initiators, seat belt pretensioners,

and lithium batteries contained

in remote keyless entry transmitters,

may contain perchlorate materials.

Special handling may be necessary.

For additional information, see

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-3

Doing Your Own

Service Work

{CAUTION

You can be injured and your

vehicle could be damaged if

you try to do service work on a

vehicle without knowing enough

about it.

•Be sure you have sufficient

knowledge, experience, the

proper replacement parts, and

tools before you attempt any

vehicle maintenance task.

•Be sure to use the proper

nuts, bolts, and other

fasteners. English and metric

fasteners can be easily

confused. If you use the

wrong fasteners, parts can

later break or fall off. You

could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own

service work, you should use the

proper service manual. It tells

you much more about how to

service your vehicle than this

manual can. To order the proper

service manual, see Service

Publications Ordering Information

on page 11-14.

Your vehicle has an airbag system.

Before attempting to do your

own service work, see Airbag

System Check on page 1-36.

You should keep a record with all

parts receipts and list the mileage

and the date of any service work

you perform. See “Maintenance

Record” in the Limited Warranty,

Maintenance and Owner Assistance

Information manual.

Adding Equipment to the

Outside of the Vehicle

Things you might add to the outside

of your vehicle can affect the

airﬂow around it. This can cause

wind noise and can affect fuel

economy and windshield washer

performance. Check with your

dealer/retailer before adding

equipment to the outside of your

vehicle.

9-4 Vehicle Service and Care

Owner Checks

{CAUTION

An electric fan under the hood

can start up and injure you

even when the engine is not

running. Keep hands, clothing,

and tools away from any

underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION

Things that burn can get on hot

engine parts and start a ﬁre.

These include liquids like fuel,

oil, coolant, brake ﬂuid,

windshield washer and other

ﬂuids, and plastic or rubber.

You or others could be burned.

Be careful not to drop or spill

things that will burn onto a

hot engine.

Hood Release

To open the hood:

1. Pull the handle that is located

under the instrument panel.

2. Push the secondary hood

release lever upward.

3. Lift the hood.

After the hood is slightly lifted, it will

continue to open to the full position.

Before closing the hood, be sure

all the ﬁller caps are on properly.

Then lift the hood to relieve

pressure. Pull the hood down,

close it ﬁrmly.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-5

Engine Compartment Overview

When you open the hood, this is what you will see:

9-6 Vehicle Service and Care

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on

page 9-11.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. Engine Oil

on page 9-7.

C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. Brakes

on page 9-22.

D. Coolant Reservoir. Cooling

System on page 9-16.

E. Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap.

Pressure Cap on page 9-15.

F. Engine Compartment Fuse Block

on page 9-34.

G. Battery on page 9-25.

H. Windshield Washer Fluid on

page 9-20.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick. Engine Oil

on page 9-7.

Engine Oil

If the low oil level light appears on

the instrument cluster, check

the engine oil level right away.

See Low Oil Level Light on

page 4-23. You should check the

engine oil level regularly; this is just

a reminder.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the

engine oil every time you get fuel.

In order to get an accurate reading,

the oil must be warm and the

vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle

is a yellow loop. See Engine

Compartment Overview on page 9-6

for the location of the engine oil

dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the

oil several minutes to drain back

into the oil pan. If you do not

do this, the oil dipstick might not

show the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with

a paper towel or cloth, then push

it back in all the way. Remove it

again, keeping the tip down

and check the level.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-7

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum)

mark, add at least one quart/liter of

the recommended oil. This section

explains what kind of oil to use.

For engine oil crankcase capacity,

see Capacities and Speciﬁcations on

page 10-2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.

If the engine has so much oil

that the oil level gets above the

upper mark that shows the proper

operating range, the engine

could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview

on page 9-6 for the location of

the engine oil ﬁll cap.

Add enough oil to put the level

somewhere in the proper operating

range. Push the dipstick all the

way back in when you are through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

•GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets

GM Standard GM6094M.

•SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for the

vehicle. If you are in an area

of extreme cold, where the

temperature falls below

−20°F (−29°C), use either an

SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or

an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide

easier cold starting and better

protection for the engine at

extremely low temperatures.

These numbers on an oil

container show its viscosity, or

thickness. Do not use other

viscosity oils such as

SAE 20W-50.

9-8 Vehicle Service and Care

•American Petroleum Institute

(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirements

should have the starburst symbol

on the container. This symbol

indicates that the oil has been

certiﬁed by the American

Petroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oil

identiﬁed as meeting GM Standard

GM6094M and showing the

American Petroleum Institute

Certiﬁed For Gasoline Engines

starburst symbol. Failure to use

the recommended oil can result in

engine damage not covered by

your warranty.

Engine Oil Additives

Do not add anything to the oil.

The recommended oils with

the starburst symbol that meet

GM Standard GM6094M are all you

need for good performance and

engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

Your vehicle has a computer system

that lets you know when to change

the engine oil and ﬁlter. This is

based on engine revolutions

and engine temperature, and not

on mileage. Based on driving

conditions, the mileage at which an

oil change will be indicated can

vary considerably. For the oil

life system to work properly, you

must reset the system every

time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated

that oil life has been diminished, it

will indicate that an oil change

is necessary. The letters InSP will

appear in the odometer display.

Change the oil as soon as possible

within the mileage indicated on

the display. If you are driving under

the best conditions, the oil life

system might indicate that an oil

change is necessary once a

year. The engine oil and ﬁlter must

be changed at least once a year

and at this time the system must be

reset. Your dealer/retailer has

trained service people who will

perform this work using genuine

parts and reset the system. It is also

important to check the oil regularly

and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset

accidentally, you must change the

oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)

since your last oil change.

Remember to reset the oil life

system whenever the oil is changed.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-9

How to Reset the Engine Oil

Life System

The Engine Oil Life System

calculates when to change the

engine oil and ﬁlter based on vehicle

use. Whenever the oil is changed,

reset the system so it can calculate

when the next oil change is

required. If a situation occurs where

you change the oil prior to the

letters InSP appearing in the

odometer display, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil,

reset the system:

1. Turn the ignition key to

LOCK/OFF.

2. Press the instrument panel

cluster stem until the odometer

is displayed.

3. Press and hold the cluster

stem until the letters InSP

are displayed.

4. Hold the cluster stem down and

turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.

5. The letters InSP in the instrument

panel cluster display will ﬂash.

6. Keep the cluster stem down for

at least 20 seconds and then

release the stem.

If the letters InSP and the remaining

mileage for the next oil change

appear in the instrument panel

cluster display, the system is

properly reset.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certain

elements that can be unhealthy for

your skin and could even cause

cancer. Do not let used oil stay on

your skin for very long. Clean your

skin and nails with soap and water,

or a good hand cleaner. Wash or

properly dispose of clothing or rags

containing used engine oil. See the

manufacturer’s warnings about the

use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the

environment. If you change your own

oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the

ﬁlter before disposal. Never dispose

of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring

it on the ground, into sewers, or into

streams or bodies of water. Recycle

it by taking it to a place that collects

used oil.

9-10 Vehicle Service and Care

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview

on page 9-6 for the location of

the engine air cleaner/ﬁlter.

When to Inspect the Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/ﬁlter at the

Maintenance II intervals and replace

it at the ﬁrst oil change after each

50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.

See “Schedule Maintenance”

in Service and Maintenance for

more information. If you are driving

in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect

the ﬁlter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/ﬁlter,

remove the ﬁlter from the vehicle

and lightly shake the ﬁlter to release

loose dust and dirt. If the ﬁlter

remains caked with dirt, a new ﬁlter

is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air

cleaner/ﬁlter.

1. Remove the screws that hold

the cover on.

2. Disconnect the electrical

connector.

3. Lift off the cover.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air

cleaner/ﬁlter.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to

reinstall the cover and reconnect

the electrical connector.

{CAUTION

Operating the engine with the

air cleaner/ﬁlter off can cause

you or others to be burned.

The air cleaner not only cleans

the air; it helps to stop ﬂames if

the engine backﬁres. If it is not

there and the engine backﬁres,

you could be burned. Do not

drive with it off, and be careful

working on the engine with the

air cleaner/ﬁlter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/ﬁlter

is off, a backﬁre can cause a

damaging engine ﬁre. And, dirt

can easily get into your engine,

which will damage it. Always have

the air cleaner/ﬁlter in place

when you are driving.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-11

Automatic Transmission

Fluid

It is not necessary to check

the transmission ﬂuid level.

A transmission ﬂuid leak is the only

reason for ﬂuid loss. If a leak

occurs, take your vehicle to the

dealer/retailer service department

and have it repaired as soon

as possible.

Change the ﬂuid and ﬁlter at the

intervals listed in the Maintenance

Schedule. See “Additional

Required Services” in Service

and Maintenance. Be sure to use

the transmission ﬂuid listed in

“Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in Service and

Maintenance.

Notice: Use of the incorrect

automatic transmission ﬂuid

may damage your vehicle,

and the damages may not be

covered by your warranty.

See “Recommended Fluids

and Lubricants” in the Limited

Warranty, Maintenance and Owner

Assistance Information manual.

Manual Transmission

Fluid

It is not necessary to check the

manual transmission ﬂuid level.

A transmission ﬂuid leak is the only

reason for ﬂuid loss. If a leak

occurs, take the vehicle to the

dealer/retailer service department

and have it repaired as soon

as possible. You may also have

your ﬂuid level checked by

your dealer/retailer when you have

your oil changed. See “Part D:

Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in Service and

Maintenance for the proper ﬂuid

to use.

Hydraulic Clutch

The hydraulic clutch linkage in

your vehicle is self-adjusting.

This system does not have its own

reservoir. It receives ﬂuid from

the brake master cylinder reservoir.

See Brakes on page 9-22 for more

information.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in your vehicle

is ﬁlled with DEX-COOL

engine

coolant. This coolant is designed to

remain in your vehicle for ﬁve years

or 150,000 miles (240 000 km),

whichever occurs ﬁrst, if you add

only DEX-COOL

extended life

coolant.

The following explains your cooling

system and how to add coolant

when it is low. If you have a problem

with engine overheating, see

Engine Overheating on page 9-15.

9-12 Vehicle Service and Care

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable

water and DEX-COOL

coolant will:

•Give freezing protection down

to −34°F (−37°C).

•Give boiling protection up to

265°F (129°C).

•Protect against rust and

corrosion.

•Help keep the proper engine

temperature.

•Let the warning lights and gages

work as they should.

Notice: Using coolant other than

DEX-COOL

can cause premature

engine, heater core, or radiator

corrosion. In addition, the engine

coolant may require changing

sooner, at the ﬁrst maintenance

service after each 30,000 miles

(50 000 km) or 24 months,

whichever occurs ﬁrst. Any

repairs would not be covered by

the vehicle warranty. Always

use DEX-COOL

(silicate-free)

coolant in the vehicle.

What to Use

Use a mixture of one-half clean,

drinkable water and one-half

DEX-COOL

coolant which will not

damage aluminum parts. If you

use this coolant mixture, you do not

need to add anything else.

{CAUTION

Adding only plain water to

the cooling system can be

dangerous. Plain water, or

some other liquid such as

alcohol, can boil before the

proper coolant mixture will.

The vehicle’s coolant warning

system is set for the proper

coolant mixture. With plain

water or the wrong mixture,

the engine could get too hot

but would not get the overheat

warning. The engine could

catch ﬁre and you or others

could be burned. Use a 50/50

mixture of clean, drinkable

water and DEX-COOL

coolant.

Notice: If an improper coolant

mixture is used, the engine could

overheat and be badly damaged.

The repair cost would not be

covered by the vehicle warranty.

Too much water in the mixture

can freeze and crack the engine,

radiator, heater core, and

other parts.

Notice: If you use extra

inhibitors and/or additives in

your vehicle’s cooling system,

you could damage your vehicle.

Use only the proper mixture of

the engine coolant listed in

this manual for the cooling

system. See Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants in the

Maintenance and Limited

Warranty and Owner Assistance

Information manual.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-13

Checking Coolant

The coolant reservoir is located in

the engine compartment on the

driver’s side of the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview

on page 9-6 for more information

on location.

{CAUTION

Turning the coolant reservoir

pressure cap when the engine

and radiator are hot can allow

steam and scalding liquids to

blow out and burn you badly.

Never turn the coolant

reservoir pressure cap - even

a little - when the engine and

radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level

surface. When your engine is cold,

the coolant level should be at

the KALT/COLD line.

Do not overﬁll the coolant reservoir.

Too much coolant can result in

an overﬂow condition when the

ﬂuid is hot.

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the

proper DEX-COOL

coolant mixture

at the coolant reservoir, but only

when the engine is cool. If the

coolant reservoir is empty, a special

ﬁll procedure is necessary. See

Cooling System on page 9-16

for instructions on “How to Add

Coolant to the Coolant Reservoir.”

{CAUTION

You can be burned if you spill

coolant on hot engine parts.

Coolant contains ethylene

glycol, and it will burn if the

engine parts are hot enough.

Do not spill coolant on a hot

engine.

When replacing the pressure cap,

make sure it is hand-tight and

fully seated.

9-14 Vehicle Service and Care

Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not

tightly installed, coolant loss

and possible engine damage may

occur. Be sure the cap is

properly and tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview

on page 9-6 for more information

on location.

Engine Overheating

There is an engine coolant

temperature warning light on

your vehicle’s instrument panel.

See Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light on page 4-19 for

more information.

If Steam Is Coming From

Your Engine

{CAUTION

Steam from an overheated

engine can burn you badly,

even if you just open the hood.

Stay away from the engine if

you see or hear steam coming

from it. Just turn it off and

get everyone away from the

vehicle until it cools down.

Wait until there is no sign of

steam or coolant before you

open the hood.

If you keep driving when your

engine is overheated, the

liquids in it can catch ﬁre.

You or others could be badly

burned. Stop your engine if it

overheats, and get out of the

vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If the engine catches ﬁre

because of being driven with

no coolant, your vehicle can be

badly damaged. The costly

repairs would not be covered by

the vehicle warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From

Your Engine

An engine coolant temperature

warning can indicate a serious

problem. See Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning Light on

page 4-19.

If you get an engine coolant

temperature warning, but see or hear

no steam, the problem may not be

too serious. Sometimes the engine

can get a little too hot when you:

•Climb a long hill on a hot day.

•Stop after high-speed driving.

•Idle for long periods in traffic.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-15

If you get the engine coolant

temperature warning with no sign of

steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on,

turn it off.

2. In heavy traffic, let the engine

idle in N (NEUTRAL) while

stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull

off the road, shift to P (PARK)

or N (NEUTRAL) and let

the engine idle.

3. Turn on your heater to full hot at

the highest fan speed and open

the windows as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat

warning, you can drive. Just to

be safe, drive slower for about

10 minutes. If the warning does not

come back on, you can drive

normally.

If the warning continues and you

have not stopped, pull over, stop,

and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam,

you can idle the engine for

three minutes while you are parked.

If you still have the warning, turn

off the engine and get everyone out

of the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood

but to get service help right away.

Cooling System

When you decide it is safe to lift the

hood, this is what you see:

A. Coolant Reservoir

B. Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fans

(Out of view)

9-16 Vehicle Service and Care

{CAUTION

An electric engine cooling fan

under the hood can start up

even when the engine is not

running and can cause injury.

Keep hands, clothing, and tools

away from any underhood

electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant

reservoir is boiling, do not do

anything else until it cools down.

The vehicle should be parked on a

level surface.

The coolant level should be at or

above the KALT/COLD mark on the

coolant reservoir. If it is not, you

may have a leak at the coolant

reservoir pressure cap or in

the radiator hoses, heater hoses,

radiator, water pump, or somewhere

else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION

Heater and radiator hoses, and

other engine parts, can be very

hot. Do not touch them. If you

do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there

is a leak. If you run the engine,

it could lose all coolant.

That could cause an engine

ﬁre, and you could be burned.

Get any leak ﬁxed before you

drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak,

with the engine on, check to see

if the electric engine cooling fans are

running. If the engine is overheating,

both fans should be running.

If they are not, your vehicle needs

service.

Notice: Engine damage from

running the engine without

coolant is not covered by the

warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other

than DEX-COOL

can cause

premature engine, heater core,

or radiator corrosion. In addition,

the engine coolant could require

changing sooner, at 30,000 miles

(50 000 km) or 24 months,

whichever occurs ﬁrst. Any

repairs would not be covered

by the vehicle warranty. Always

use DEX-COOL

(silicate-free)

coolant in the vehicle.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-17

How to Add Coolant to the

Coolant Reservoir

Notice: This vehicle has a

speciﬁc coolant ﬁll procedure.

Failure to follow this procedure

could cause the engine to

overheat and be severely

damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet,

check to see if coolant is visible

in the coolant reservoir. If coolant is

visible but the coolant level is not

at or above the KALT/COLD

mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL

coolant at the coolant reservoir,

but be sure the cooling system,

including the coolant reservoir

pressure cap, is cool before you

do it. See Engine Coolant on

page 9-12 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the coolant

reservoir, add coolant as follows:

{CAUTION

Steam and scalding liquids

from a hot cooling system can

blow out and burn you badly.

They are under pressure,

and if you turn the coolant

reservoir pressure cap — even

a little — they can come out at

high speed. Never turn the cap

when the cooling system,

including the coolant reservoir

pressure cap, is hot. Wait for

the cooling system and coolant

reservoir pressure cap to cool

if you ever have to turn the

pressure cap.

{CAUTION

Adding only plain water to

the cooling system can be

dangerous. Plain water, or

some other liquid such as

alcohol, can boil before the

proper coolant mixture will.

The vehicle’s coolant warning

system is set for the proper

coolant mixture. With plain

water or the wrong mixture, the

engine could get too hot but

you would not get the overheat

warning. The engine could

catch ﬁre and you or others

could be burned. Use a 50/50

mixture of clean, drinkable

water and DEX-COOL

coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water

can freeze and crack the engine,

radiator, heater core and other

parts. Use the recommended

coolant and the proper coolant

mixture.

9-18 Vehicle Service and Care

{CAUTION

You can be burned if you spill

coolant on hot engine parts.

Coolant contains ethylene

glycol and it will burn if the

engine parts are hot enough.

Do not spill coolant on a hot

engine.

1. Remove the coolant reservoir

pressure cap when the cooling

system, including the coolant

reservoir pressure cap and

upper radiator hose, is no

longer hot. Turn the coolant

reservoir pressure cap slowly

counterclockwise about two

or two and one-half turns.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that

to stop. This will allow any

pressure still left to be vented

out the discharge hose.

2. Keep turning the coolant

reservoir pressure cap slowly,

and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant reservoir with

the proper mixture, to the

KALT/COLD mark. Wait about

ﬁve minutes, then check to

see if the level is below the

mark. If the level is below the

KALT/COLD mark, add additional

coolant to bring the level up to

the mark. Repeat this procedure

until the level remains constant

at the KALT/COLD mark for

at least ﬁve minutes.

4. With the coolant reservoir

pressure cap off, start the

engine and let it run until you

can feel the upper radiator hose

getting hot. Watch out for the

engine cooling fans.

By this time, the coolant level

inside the coolant reservoir might

be lower. If the level is lower

than the KALT/COLD mark,

add more of the proper mixture

to the coolant reservoir until

the level reaches the

KALT/COLD mark.

5. Replace the coolant reservoir

pressure cap. Be sure the

pressure cap is hand-tight and

fully seated.

Coolant Reservoir

Pressure Cap

Vehicle Service and Care 9-19

Power Steering Fluid

When to Check Power

Steering Fluid

It is not necessary to check the

power steering ﬂuid level. A power

steering ﬂuid leak is the only

reason for ﬂuid loss. If a leak

occurs, take your vehicle to the

dealer/retailer service department

and have it repaired as soon

as possible.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to Use

When you need windshield

washer ﬂuid, be sure to read the

manufacturer’s instructions before

use. If you will be operating

your vehicle in an area where the

temperature may fall below freezing,

use a ﬂuid that has sufficient

protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washer

symbol on it. Add washer ﬂuid

until the tank is full. See Engine

Compartment Overview on page 9-6

for reservoir location.

Notice:

•When using concentrated

washer ﬂuid, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for

adding water.

•Do not mix water with

ready-to-use washer ﬂuid.

Water can cause the solution

to freeze and damage your

washer ﬂuid tank and other

parts of the washer system.

Also, water does not clean as

well as washer ﬂuid.

•Fill the washer ﬂuid tank only

three-quarters full when it is

very cold. This allows for ﬂuid

expansion if freezing occurs,

which could damage the tank if

it is completely full.

•Do not use engine coolant

(antifreeze) in your windshield

washer. It can damage the

vehicle’s windshield washer

system and paint.

9-20 Vehicle Service and Care

Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement

Front Windshield Wiper

Windshield wiper blades should be

inspected for wear or cracking.

See “Maintenance Replacement

Parts” in the Limited Warranty,

Maintenance and owner Assistance

Information manual for the proper

type and length.

Raise the wiper arm, tilt the wiper

blade at a 90° angle to the

wiper arm, and remove to the side.

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. With the key in the ignition and

key in the LOCK position, press

the wiper lever down. Release

the wiper lever when the wipers

are in the vertical position.

3. Raise the wiper arm away from

the windshield.

4. Turn the wiper blade at a 90°

angle to the wiper arm and

remove the blade to the side.

5. Install the new wiper blade.

6. Lower the wiper arm on to the

windshield.

Rear Windshield Wiper

1. Lift the wiper arm straight up.

2. Push the wiper blade straight out

of the wiper arm to remove.

3. Install the new wiper blade.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-21

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder and, on

manual transmission vehicles,

the clutch hydraulic system use the

same reservoir. The reservoir is

ﬁlled with DOT-4 brake ﬂuid.

See Engine Compartment Overview

on page 9-6 for the location of

the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the

brake ﬂuid level in the reservoir

might go down. The ﬁrst is that the

brake ﬂuid goes down to an

acceptable level during normal

brake lining wear. When new linings

are put in, the ﬂuid level goes

back up. The other reason is that

ﬂuid is leaking out of the brake

or clutch hydraulic system. If it is,

have the brake or clutch hydraulic

system ﬁxed, since a leak means

that sooner or later the brakes

or clutch will not work well.

It is not a good idea to top off the

brake ﬂuid. Adding brake ﬂuid

will not correct a leak. If ﬂuid is

added when the linings are worn,

there will be too much ﬂuid

when new brake linings are

installed. Add or remove brake ﬂuid,

as necessary, only when work is

done on the brake or clutch

hydraulic system.

{CAUTION

If your vehicle has too much

brake ﬂuid, it can spill on the

engine. The ﬂuid will burn if the

engine is hot enough. You or

others could be burned, and

your vehicle could be damaged.

Add brake ﬂuid only when work

is done on the brake and/or

clutch hydraulic system.

Refer to “Scheduled Maintenance”

in the Limited Warranty,

Maintenance and Owner Assistance

Information manual to determine

when to check the brake ﬂuid.

Checking Brake Fluid

The brake ﬂuid can be checked

without taking off the cap by looking

at the brake ﬂuid reservoir.

The ﬂuid level should be above

MIN. If it is not, have your brake

hydraulic system checked to see

if there is a leak. After work is done

on the brake hydraulic system,

make sure the level is above the

MIN but not over the MAX mark.

What to Add

When you do need brake ﬂuid,

use only DOT-4 brake ﬂuid.

It is recommended that you ﬂush

the brake hydraulic system and

reﬁll it with new DOT-4 ﬂuid

at a regular maintenance service

every two years. See “Additional

9-22 Vehicle Service and Care

Required Services” in the Limited

Warranty, Maintenance and

Owner Assistance Information

manual. Use new brake ﬂuid

from a sealed container only.

See “Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in the Limited Warranty,

Maintenance and Owner Assistance

Information manual.

Always clean the brake ﬂuid

reservoir cap and the area

around the cap before removing it.

This helps keep dirt from entering

the reservoir.

{CAUTION

With the wrong kind of ﬂuid in

the brake hydraulic system,

the brakes might not work well.

This could cause a crash.

Always use the proper brake

ﬂuid.

Notice:

•Using the wrong ﬂuid can

badly damage brake

hydraulic system parts.

For example, just a few drops

of mineral-based oil, such

as engine oil, in the brake

hydraulic system can

damage brake hydraulic

system parts so badly that

they will have to be replaced.

Do not let someone put in

the wrong kind of ﬂuid.

•If you spill brake ﬂuid on your

vehicle’s painted surfaces, the

paint ﬁnish can be damaged.

Be careful not to spill brake

ﬂuid on your vehicle. If you

do, wash it off immediately.

See Exterior Cleaning on

page 9-75.

Brake Wear

Your vehicle has disc brakes.

Notice: Continuing to drive

with worn-out brake pads could

result in costly brake repair.

Front disc brake pads have built-in

brake pad wear indicators that

make a high-pitched warning sound

when the brake pads are worn

and new pads are needed.

The sound can come and go or be

heard all the time your vehicle is

moving, except when you are

pushing on the brake pedal ﬁrmly.

{CAUTION

The brake wear warning sound

means that soon the brakes will

not work well. That could lead

to an accident. When you hear

the brake wear warning sound,

have your vehicle serviced.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-23

Rear disc brake pads do not have

built-in brake pad wear indicators.

Periodic visual inspection of the rear

brake pads is required to determine

when to replace the pads. Visually

inspect the rear brake pads

whenever the rear wheels are

removed such as during tire rotation.

1. Set the parking brake and make

sure that the brakes have been

given enough time to cool.

2. Remove the rear wheels.

3. Visually inspect the rear brake

inner pads (C) at each rear

wheel through the inspection

window in the brake caliper (A).

Brake pads should be replaced

when the inner pad (C) is

worn to 5/64 in (2 mm) of pad

thickness (B). New brake

pads, with no wear, are 25/64 of

an inch (10 mm) thick.

4. After brake pad inspection or

replacement, install the rear

wheels.

Some driving conditions or climates

can cause a brake squeal when

the brakes are ﬁrst applied or lightly

applied. This does not mean

something is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel bolts are

necessary to help prevent brake

pulsation. When tires are rotated,

inspect brake pads for wear and

evenly tighten wheel bolts in

the proper sequence to torque

speciﬁcations in Capacities

and Speciﬁcations on page 10-2.

Brake linings should always

be replaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer/retailer if the brake

pedal does not return to normal

height, or if there is a rapid increase

in pedal travel. This could be a sign

that brake service might be required.

Brake Adjustment

Every time you make a brake stop,

the disc brakes adjust for wear.

9-24 Vehicle Service and Care

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle

is complex. Its many parts have to

be of top quality and work well

together if the vehicle is to have

really good braking. Your vehicle

was designed and tested with

top-quality brake parts. When you

replace parts of the braking

system — for example, when the

brake linings wear down and

you need new ones put in — be

sure you get new approved

replacement parts. If you do not,

the brakes might not work properly.

For example, if someone puts in

brake linings that are wrong for

your vehicle, the balance between

the front and rear brakes can

change — for the worse. The

braking performance you have

come to expect can change in many

other ways if someone puts in the

wrong replacement brake parts.

Battery

Your vehicle has a maintenance

free battery. When it is time

for a new battery, see your

dealer/retailer for one that has the

replacement number shown on

the original battery’s label.

See Engine Compartment Overview

on page 9-6 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals,

and related accessories contain

lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and

reproductive harm. Wash hands

after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{CAUTION

Batteries have acid that can

burn you and gas that can

explode. You can be badly hurt

if you are not careful. See Jump

Starting on page 9-68 for tips

on working around a battery

without getting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If you drive your

vehicle infrequently, remove the

black, negative (−) cable from

the battery. This will help keep the

battery from running down.

Extended Storage: For extended

storage of your vehicle, remove the

black, negative (−) cable from

the battery or use a battery trickle

charger. This will help maintain

the charge of the battery over an

extended period of time.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-25

Headlamp Aiming

The optical headlamp aiming system

has been preset at the factory

and should need no further

adjustment.

However, If the vehicle is damaged

in a crash, the headlamp aim

may be affected and adjustment

may be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles ﬂash their high

beams at you, this may also mean

the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle

is taken to your dealer/retailer for

service if the headlamps need to be

re-aimed. It is possible however, to

re-aim the headlamps as described.

The vehicle should:

•Be placed so the headlamps

are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light

colored wall.

•Have all four tires on a perfectly

level surface which is level all

the way to the wall.

•Be placed so it is perpendicular

to the wall.

•Not have any snow, ice, or

mudonit.

•Be fully assembled and all other

work stopped while headlamp

aiming is being done.

•Have a full tank of fuel and

one person or 160 lbs (75 kg)

on the driver seat.

•Have all tires properly inﬂated.

Headlamp aiming is done with the

vehicle’s low-beam headlamps.

The high-beam headlamps will be

correctly aimed if the low-beam

headlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim on

the headlamps:

1. Open the hood. See Hood

Release on page 9-5 for more

information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of

the low-beam headlamp.

9-26 Vehicle Service and Care

3. Record the distance from the

ground to the aim dot on the

low-beam headlamp.

4. At a wall, measure from the

ground upward (A) to the

recorded distance from Step 3

and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)

on the wall the width of the

vehicle at the height of the

mark in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp

to improve beam cut-off when

aiming. Covering a headlamp may

cause excessive heat build-up

which may cause damage to the

headlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps

and place a piece of cardboard

or equivalent in front of the

headlamp not being adjusted.

Do not place it directly on

the headlamp. This allows only

the beam of light from the

headlamp being adjusted to

be seen on the ﬂat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlamp

aiming screws, which are under

the hood near each headlamp

assembly.

The adjustment screw can be

turned with a 6 mm socket

wrench.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw

until the headlamp beam is aimed

to the horizontal tape line. Turn it

clockwise or counterclockwise

to raise or lower the angle of

the beam.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-27

9. Make sure that the light from the

headlamp is positioned at the

bottom edge of the horizontal

tape line. The lamp on the left (A)

shows the correct headlamp aim.

The lamp on the right (B) shows

the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for

the opposite headlamp.

Bulb Replacement

For the proper type of replacement

bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs

on page 9-33.

For any bulb changing procedure

not listed in this section, contact

your dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION

Halogen bulbs have

pressurized gas inside and can

burst if you drop or scratch the

bulb. You or others could be

injured. Be sure to read and

follow the instructions on the

bulb package.

Front Turn Signal Lamps

1. The bulbs of the turn signal lamp

are replaced through openings in

the front wheel wells. Turn the

wheel to gain access to the push

tabs and remove the cover.

9-28 Vehicle Service and Care

2. Turn the bulb socket

counterclockwise and pull

straight out.

3. Turn bulb counterclockwise

and remove.

4. Install new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 to

reinstall.

Taillamps

(Five-Door Hatchback)

A. Backup Lamp

B. Taillamp

C. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn

Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. To replace the bulbs on the

driver side, turn both locks

and remove the cover.

To replace the bulbs on the

passenger side, turn the lock

clockwise and remove the cover.

3. Detach the plug connector

from the bulb assembly.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-29

4. Turn the nuts counterclockwise

and hold the outside of taillamp

assembly.

5. Pull the taillamp assembly

straight out.

6. Remove the three nuts.

7. Press on the tabs on the outside

of bulb assembly and remove the

bulb assembly.

8. Remove the bulb from the bulb

assembly.

9. Install a new bulb without

touching the glass.

10. Reinstall the bulb assembly in

taillamp assembly.

11. Make sure the seals are applied

to the taillamp assembly and

screws.

12. Insert the taillamp assembly

into the body.

13. Reinstall the three nuts.

14. Attach the plug connector to the

bulb assembly.

Taillamps

(Three-Door Hatchback)

A. Backup Lamp

B. Taillamp

C. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn

Signal Lamp

9-30 Vehicle Service and Care

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on

page 2-6 for more information.

2. Detach the plug connector from

the bulb assembly.

3. Turn the nuts counterclockwise

and hold the outside of taillamp

assembly.

4. Pull the taillamp assembly

straight out.

5. Remove the seal.

6. Press on the tabs on outside of

bulb assembly and remove the

bulb assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the bulb

assembly.

8. Install a new bulb without

touching the glass.

9. Reinstall the bulb assembly in

taillamp assembly.

10. Make sure the seals are applied

to the taillamp assembly and

screws.

11. Insert the taillamp assembly

into the body.

12. Reinstall the three nuts.

13. Attach the plug connector to the

bulb assembly.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-31

License Plate Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push tab in and pull down on it to

remove the license plate lamp.

2. Turn and pull the license plate

lamp toward you through the

opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket

counterclockwise and pull the

bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to

reinstall the license plate lamp.

9-32 Vehicle Service and Care

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb

Number

Front Turn

Signal Lamp 3157 NAK

License Plate

Lamp W5W

Parking Lamp 4157K

Taillamp W21

For replacement bulbs not listed

here, contact your dealer/retailer.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical

Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything

electrical to your vehicle unless

you check with your dealer/retailer

ﬁrst. Some electrical equipment

can damage your vehicle and the

damage would not be covered by

your warranty. Some add-on

electrical equipment can keep

other components from working

as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your

vehicle’s battery, even if your vehicle

is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system.

Before attempting to add anything

electrical to your vehicle, see

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle on page 1-34.

Headlamp Wiring

The headlamp wiring is protected

by fuses in the fuse block.

An electrical overload will cause

the lamps to turn off. If this happens,

have your headlamp wiring checked

right away.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-33

Windshield Wiper Fuses

The windshield wiper motor is

protected by a circuit breaker and a

fuse. If the motor overheats due

to heavy snow, etc., the wiper

will stop until the motor cools.

If the overload is caused by some

electrical problem, have it ﬁxed.

Power Windows and

Other Power Options

Circuit breakers in the fuse block

protect the power windows and

other power accessories. When the

current load is too heavy, the

circuit breaker opens and closes,

protecting the circuit until the

problem is ﬁxed or goes away.

Fuses

The wiring circuits in your vehicle

are protected from short circuits by a

combination of fuses and circuit

breakers. This greatly reduces the

chance of damage caused by

electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band

inside the fuse. If the band is broken

or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure

to replace a bad fuse with a new one

of the identical size and rating.

There are two fuse blocks in

your vehicle: one in the engine

compartment and one in the trunk.

There is a fuse puller located

on the rear compartment fuse block.

See Rear Compartment Fuse

Block on page 9-36. It can be used

to easily remove fuses from the

fuse block.

Engine Compartment

Fuse Block

The engine compartment fuse block

is located in the front left side of

the engine compartment. Engine

Compartment Overview on

page 9-6.

To open the fuse block cover,

insert a tool into the latch and turn.

Pull up on the cover to remove.

Notice: Spilling liquid on any

electrical components on

your vehicle may damage it.

Always keep the covers on any

electrical component.

9-34 Vehicle Service and Care

Fuses Usage

1Antilock Brake

System (ABS) Valves

2 ABS Pump

Fuses Usage

4Climate Control

System (Ignition)

5Engine Cooling

Fan (AT and AC only)

Fuses Usage

6 Engine Cooling Fan

7Windshield & Liftgate

Glass Washer Motor

Vehicle Service and Care 9-35

Fuses Usage

8 Horn

10 Door Locks

13 Foglamps

14 Windshield Wipers

(high speed)

15 Windshield Wipers

(low speed)

16 Antilock Brake System,

Brake Lamp Switch

17 Vacuum Pump

18 Starter

20 Air Conditioning Clutch

21 Engine Control

Module (ECM)

(Main Relay)

22 ECM (Battery)

24 Fuel Pump/Injectors

Fuses Usage

26 ECM (Sensor and

Actuators)

27 Power Steering

28 Automatic

Transmission (Battery)

29 Automatic

Transmission (Ignition)

30 ECM (Ignition)

32 Brake Switch

34 Steering Column

Module

35 Radio

36 OnStar™ Module/

OnStar™ Interface

Module/Display

Rear Compartment Fuse

Block

To open the liftgate, See Liftgate on

page 2-6.

The rear compartment fuse block is

located on the left side of the

cargo area behind a cover.

9-36 Vehicle Service and Care

Use the fuse puller, to remove and replace fuses.

Fuses Usage

1 Front Power Window

3 Cluster

Fuses Usage

4Climate Control

System (Battery)

11 Rear Defogger

Fuses Usage

12 Rear Windshield Wiper

14 Climate Control

System (Ignition)

Vehicle Service and Care 9-37

Fuses Usage

16 Front Passenger Seat

Detection Sensor

Tire Pressure

Monitoring

System (TPMS)/

Rain Sensor/Inside

Rearview Mirror

18 Interior Lights

21 Outside Mirror Heating

22 Sunroof

23 Rear Power Window

24 Diagnostic Link

Connector

29 Accessory Power

Outlet (APO)

34 Sunroof

38 Door Locks

39 Seat Heating Driver

40 Seat Heating Front

Passenger

Tires

Your new vehicle comes with

high-quality tires made by

a leading tire manufacturer.

If you ever have questions about

the tire warranty and where to

obtain service, see the “Limited

Warranty, Maintenance and

Owner Assistance Information”

manual for details.

{CAUTION

•Poorly maintained and

improperly used tires are

dangerous.

•Overloading your tires can

cause overheating as a

result of too much ﬂexing.

You could have an air-out

and a serious accident.

See Loading the Vehicle

on page 8-30.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

•Underinﬂated tires pose

the same danger as

overloaded tires.

The resulting accident

could cause serious

injury. Check all tires

frequently to maintain the

recommended pressure.

Tire pressure should be

checked when your tires

are cold. See Inﬂation - Tire

Pressure on page 9-46.

•Overinﬂated tires are more

likely to be cut, punctured,

or broken by a sudden

impact — such as when

you hit a pothole. Keep

tires at the recommended

pressure.

(Continued)

9-38 Vehicle Service and Care

CAUTION (Continued)

•Worn, old tires can cause

accidents. If your tread

is badly worn, or if your

tires have been damaged,

replace them.

See High-Speed Operation

on page 9-47 for inﬂation

pressure adjustment for

high speed driving.

Low-Proﬁle Tires

If the vehicle has 225/40ZR18

or 215/45R18 size tires, they

are classiﬁed as low-proﬁle

performance tires. These tires

are designed for very responsive

driving on wet or dry pavement.

You may also notice more

road noise with low-proﬁle

performance tires and that they

tend to wear faster.

Notice: If the vehicle has

low-proﬁle tires, they are

more susceptible to damage

from road hazards or curb

impact than standard proﬁle

tires. Tire and/or wheel

assembly damage can occur

when coming into contact with

road hazards like, potholes,

or sharp edged objects,

or when sliding into a curb.

The vehicle warranty does not

cover this type of damage.

Keep tires set to the correct

inﬂation pressure and,

when possible avoid contact

with curbs, potholes, and

other road hazards.

Winter Tires

If the vehicle has 225/40ZR18 or

215/45R18 size tires, they are

classiﬁed as low-proﬁle performance

tires. These tires are designed for

very responsive driving on wet or dry

pavement. If you expect to drive

on snow or ice covered roads often,

you may want to get winter tires

for your vehicle. All season tires

provide good overall performance on

most surfaces but they may not

offer the traction you would like or

the same level of performance

as winter tires on snow or ice

covered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are

designed for increased traction on

snow and ice covered roads.

With winter tires, there may be

decreased dry road traction,

increased road noise, and shorter

tire tread life. After switching to

winter tires, be alert for changes in

vehicle handling and braking.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-39

See your dealer/retailer for details

regarding winter tire availability

and proper tire selection. Also, see

Buying New Tires on page 9-54.

If you choose to use winter tires:

•Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheel

positions.

•Use only radial ply tires of the

same size, load range, and

speed rating as your original

equipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed

rating as the original equipment tires

may not be available for H, V, W,

Y and ZR speed rated tires.

If you choose winter tires with a

lower speed rating, never exceed

the tire’s maximum speed capability.

Tire Sidewall Labeling

Useful information about a

tire is molded into its sidewall.

The examples below show

a typical passenger vehicle

tire and a compact spare

tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size:The tire size is

a combination of letters and

numbers used to deﬁne a

particular tire’s width, height,

aspect ratio, construction

type, and service description.

See the “Tire Size” illustration

later in this section for more

detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire

Performance Criteria

Speciﬁcation):Original

equipment tires designed to

GM’s speciﬁc tire performance

criteria have a TPC speciﬁcation

code molded onto the sidewall.

GM’s TPC speciﬁcations meet

or exceed all federal safety

guidelines.

Transportation):The

Department of Transportation

(DOT) code indicates that the tire

is in compliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

Example

9-40 Vehicle Service and Care

(D) Tire Identiﬁcation Number

(TIN):The letters and numbers

following DOT (Department

of Transportation) code is the

Tire Identiﬁcation Number (TIN).

The TIN shows the manufacturer

and plant code, tire size, and

date the tire was manufactured.

The TIN is molded onto both

sides of the tire, although only

one side may have the date

of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material:The type

of cord and number of plies in the

sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality

Grading (UTQG):Tire

manufacturers are required to

grade tires based on three

performance factors: treadwear,

traction, and temperature

resistance. For more information

see Uniform Tire Quality

Grading on page 9-56.

(G) Maximum Cold Inﬂation

Load Limit:Maximum load

that can be carried and the

maximum pressure needed to

support that load.

(A) Tire Ply Material:The type

of cord and number of plies in the

sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:

The compact spare tire or

temporary use tire has a tread

life of approximately 3,000 miles

(5 000 km) and should not be

driven at speeds over 50 mph

(80 km/h). The compact

spare tire is for emergency use

when a regular road tire has

lost air and gone ﬂat. If your

vehicle has a compact spare tire.

See Compact Spare Tire on

page 9-67 and If a Tire

Goes Flat on page 9-60.

Number (TIN):The letters and

numbers following the DOT

(Department of Transportation)

code is the Tire Identiﬁcation

Number (TIN). The TIN shows

the manufacturer and plant code,

tire size, and date the tire was

manufactured. The TIN is

molded onto both sides of the

tire, although only one side may

have the date of manufacture.

Compact Spare Tire Example

Vehicle Service and Care 9-41

(D) Maximum Cold Inﬂation

Load Limit:Maximum load that

can be carried and the maximum

pressure needed to support

that load.

(E) Tire Inﬂation:The

temporary use tire or compact

spare tire should be inﬂated

to 60 psi (420 kPa). For more

information on tire pressure

and inﬂation see Inﬂation - Tire

Pressure on page 9-46.

(F) Tire Size :A combination of

letters and numbers deﬁne a

tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,

construction type, and service

description. The letter T as

the ﬁrst character in the tire size

means the tire is for temporary

use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire

Performance Criteria

Speciﬁcation):Original

equipment tires designed to

GM’s speciﬁc tire performance

criteria have a TPC speciﬁcation

code molded onto the sidewall.

GM’s TPC speciﬁcations meet

or exceed all federal safety

guidelines.

Tire Size

The following illustration shows

an example of a typical

passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:

The United States version of a

metric tire sizing system.

The letter P as the ﬁrst

character in the tire size

means a passenger vehicle tire

engineered to standards set by

the U.S. Tire and Rim

Association.

(B) Tire Width:The three-digit

number indicates the tire section

width in millimeters from sidewall

to sidewall.

number that indicates the tire

height-to-width measurements.

For example, if the tire size

aspect ratio is 60, as shown in

item C of the illustration, it would

mean that the tire’s sidewall is

60 percent as high as it is wide.

9-42 Vehicle Service and Care

(D) Construction Code:

A letter code is used to indicate

the type of ply construction in

the tire. The letter R means

radial ply construction; the

letter D means diagonal or

bias ply construction; and the

letter B means belted-bias

ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter:Diameter of

the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description:

These characters represent the

load range and speed rating

of the tire. The load index

represents the load carry

capacity a tire is certiﬁed to

carry. The load index can range

from 1 to 279. The speed

rating is the maximum speed a

tire is certiﬁed to carry a load.

Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and

Deﬁnitions

Air Pressure:The amount of

air inside the tire pressing

outward on each square inch

of the tire. Air pressure is

expressed in pounds per square

inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight:This means

the combined weight of optional

accessories. Some examples

of optional accessories are,

automatic transmission, power

steering, power brakes, power

windows, power seats, and air

conditioning.

Aspect Ratio:The relationship

of a tire’s height to its width.

Belt:A rubber coated layer of

cords that is located between the

plies and the tread. Cords may

be made from steel or other

reinforcing materials.

Bead:The tire bead contains

steel wires wrapped by steel

cords that hold the tire onto

the rim.

Bias Ply Tire:A pneumatic tire

in which the plies are laid at

alternate angles less than

90 degrees to the centerline of

the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure:The

amount of air pressure in a

tire, measured in pounds

per square inch (psi) or

kilopascals (kPa) before a tire

has built up heat from driving.

See Inﬂation - Tire Pressure on

page 9-46.

Curb Weight:The weight of a

motor vehicle with standard

and optional equipment including

the maximum capacity of fuel,

oil, and coolant, but without

passengers and cargo.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-43

DOT Markings:A code molded

into the sidewall of a tire

signifying that the tire is in

compliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation

(DOT) motor vehicle safety

standards. The DOT code

includes the Tire Identiﬁcation

Number (TIN), an alphanumeric

designator which can also

identify the tire manufacturer,

production plant, brand, and date

of production.

GVWR:Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating. See Loading the Vehicle

on page 8-30.

GAWR FRT:Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the front axle.

See Loading the Vehicle on

page 8-30.

GAWR RR:Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the rear axle.

See Loading the Vehicle on

page 8-30.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:

The side of an asymmetrical tire,

that must always face outward

when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa):The metric

unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:

A tire used on light duty trucks

and some multipurpose

passenger vehicles.

Load Index:An assigned

number ranging from 1 to 279

that corresponds to the load

carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inﬂation

Pressure:The maximum air

pressure to which a cold tire

can be inﬂated. The maximum

air pressure is molded onto

the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:

The load rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inﬂation

pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle

Weight:The sum of curb

weight, accessory weight,

vehicle capacity weight, and

production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight:The

number of occupants a vehicle

is designed to seat multiplied by

150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading

the Vehicle on page 8-30.

Occupant Distribution:

Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall:

The side of an asymmetrical tire

that has a particular side that

faces outward when mounted on

a vehicle. The side of the tire

that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering, or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the

same moldings on the

other sidewall of the tire.

9-44 Vehicle Service and Care

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:

A tire used on passenger cars

and some light duty trucks

and multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inﬂation

Pressure:Vehicle

manufacturer’s recommended

tire inﬂation pressure as shown

on the tire placard. See

Inﬂation - Tire Pressure on

page 9-46 and Loading

the Vehicle on page 8-30.

Radial Ply Tire:A pneumatic

tire in which the ply cords that

extend to the beads are laid

at 90 degrees to the centerline

of the tread.

Rim:A metal support for a tire

and upon which the tire beads

are seated.

Sidewall:The portion of a tire

between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating:An alphanumeric

code assigned to a tire indicating

the maximum speed at which a

tire can operate.

Traction:The friction between

the tire and the road surface.

The amount of grip provided.

Tread:The portion of a tire that

comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators:Narrow

bands, sometimes called wear

bars, that show across the tread

of a tire when only 1/16 inch

(1.6 mm) of tread remains.

See When It Is Time for New

Tires on page 9-53.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality

Grading Standards):A tire

information system that provides

consumers with ratings for a

tire’s traction, temperature,

and treadwear. Ratings are

determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing

procedures. The ratings are

molded into the sidewall of the

tire. See Uniform Tire Quality

Grading on page 9-56.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:

The number of designated

seating positions multiplied

by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the

rated cargo load. See Loading

the Vehicle on page 8-30.

Vehicle Maximum Load on

the Tire:Load on an individual

tire due to curb weight,

accessory weight, occupant

weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard:A label

permanently attached to a

vehicle showing the vehicle’s

capacity weight and the original

equipment tire size and

recommended inﬂation pressure.

See “Tire and Loading

Information Label” under

Loading the Vehicle on

page 8-30.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-45

Inﬂation - Tire Pressure

Tires need the correct amount

of air pressure to operate

effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell

you that under-inﬂation or

over-inﬂation is all right. It is

not. If your tires do not have

enough air (under-inﬂation),

you can get the following:

• Too much ﬂexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air

(over-inﬂation), you can get

the following:

• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from

road hazards

A vehicle speciﬁc Tire and

Loading Information label is

attached to your vehicle.

This label shows your vehicle’s

original equipment tires and

the correct inﬂation pressures for

your tires when they are cold.

The recommended cold tire

inﬂation pressure, shown on the

label, is the minimum amount

of air pressure needed to

support your vehicle’s maximum

load carrying capacity.

For additional information

regarding how much weight your

vehicle can carry, and an

example of the Tire and Loading

Information label, see Loading

the Vehicle on page 8-30.

How you load your vehicle

affects vehicle handling and

ride comfort. Never load

your vehicle with more weight

than it was designed to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a month

or more. Do not forget to

check the compact spare tire, it

should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).

For additional information

regarding the compact spare

tire, see Compact Spare Tire on

page 9-67.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-type

gage to check tire pressure.

You cannot tell if your tires are

properly inﬂated simply by

looking at them. Radial tires may

look properly inﬂated even

when they are under-inﬂated.

Check the tire’s inﬂation

pressure when the tires are

cold. Cold means your vehicle

has been sitting for at least

three hours or driven no more

than 1 mile (1.6 km).

9-46 Vehicle Service and Care

Remove the valve cap from the

tire valve stem. Press the

tire gage ﬁrmly onto the valve to

get a pressure measurement.

If the cold tire inﬂation pressure

matches the recommended

pressure on the Tire and

Loading Information label, no

further adjustment is necessary.

If the inﬂation pressure is low,

add air until you reach the

recommended amount.

If you overﬁll the tire, release air

by pushing on the metal stem

in the center of the tire valve.

Re-check the tire pressure with

the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps

back on the valve stems.

They help prevent leaks by

keeping out dirt and moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph

(160 km/h) or higher, puts an

additional strain on tires.

Sustained high-speed driving

causes excessive heat build up

and can cause sudden tire

failure. You could have a crash

and you or others could be

killed. Some high-speed rated

tires require inﬂation pressure

adjustment for high speed

operation. When speed limits

and road conditions are such

that a vehicle can be driven at

high speeds, make sure the

tires are rated for high speed

operation, in excellent

condition, and set to the correct

cold tire inﬂation pressure for

the vehicle load.

If the vehicle has P205/55R16 size

tires, additional air pressure is

required when driving the vehicle at

speeds of 99 mph (158 km/h) or

higher. Set the cold tire inﬂation

pressure to the maximum inﬂation

pressure shown on the tire sidewall,

or 32 psi (220 kPa), whichever is

lower. See the example following.

Example:

The maximum load and inﬂation

pressure is molded on the tire’s

sidewall, in small letters, near the

rim ﬂange. It reads something

like this: Maximum load 710 kg

(1565 lbs) 350 kPa (51 psi) Max.

Press.

For this example, the cold tire

inﬂation pressure for high-speed

driving should be set at 32 psi

(220 kPa).

Vehicle Service and Care 9-47

When high-speed driving ends,

return the tire pressure to the

recommended cold inﬂation

pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 8-30.

Tire pressure should be checked

and correctly set when the tires are

cold. See Inﬂation - Tire Pressure

on page 9-46.

Tire Pressure Monitor

System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System

(TPMS) uses radio and sensor

technology to check tire pressure

levels. The TPMS sensors monitor

the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires

and transmit tire pressure readings to

a receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare

(if provided), should be checked

monthly when cold and inﬂated to

the inﬂation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inﬂation

pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than

the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inﬂation pressure

label, you should determine the

proper tire inﬂation pressure

for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) that illuminates a low

tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is signiﬁcantly

under-inﬂated.

Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires

as soon as possible, and inﬂate them

to the proper pressure. Driving on

a signiﬁcantly under-inﬂated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can

lead to tire failure. Under-inﬂation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability.

Please note that the TPMS is

not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inﬂation has

not reached the level to trigger

illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS

malfunction indicator is combined

with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will ﬂash for

approximately one minute and then

remain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists.

9-48 Vehicle Service and Care

When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation

of replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow

the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor

Operation on page 9-50 for

additional information.

Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) and

Industry and Science Canada

The Tire Pressure Monitor System

(TPMS) operates on a radio

frequency and complies with

Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause

harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause

undesired operation.

The TPMS operates on a radio

frequency and complies with

RSS-210 of Industry and Science

Canada. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause

interference.

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause

undesired operation of the

device.

Changes or modiﬁcations to this

system by other than an authorized

service facility could void

authorization to use this equipment.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-49

Tire Pressure Monitor

Operation

The Tire Pressure Monitor System

(TPMS) is designed to warn the

driver when a low tire pressure

condition exists. TPMS sensors are

mounted onto each tire and

wheel assembly, excluding the

spare tire. The TPMS sensors

monitor the air pressure in the

vehicle’s tires and transmit tire

pressure readings to a receiver

located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition

is detected, the TPMS illuminates

the low tire pressure warning

light located in the instrument

panel cluster.

The low tire pressure warning light

comes on at each ignition cycle

until the tires are inﬂated to

the correct inﬂation pressure.

The low tire pressure warning light

may come on in cool weather

when the vehicle is ﬁrst started, and

then turn off as you start to drive.

This could be an early indicator that

the air pressure in the tire(s) are

getting low and need to be inﬂated

to the proper pressure.

You must begin driving before the

TPMS system is operational.

TPMS sensors need to be installed

onto the full-size tire and wheel

assemblies, and the tires adjusted

to the manufacturers’ recommended

tire pressure amount.

A Tire and Load Information label is

attached to the vehicle, and shows

the size of the vehicle’s original

equipment tires and the correct

inﬂation pressure for the tires when

they are cold. See Loading the

Vehicle on page 8-30, for an

example of the Tire and Load

Information label and its location on

the vehicle. Also see Inﬂation - Tire

Pressure on page 9-46.

The vehicle’s TPMS can warn you

about a low tire pressure condition

but it does not replace normal tire

maintenance. See Tire Inspection

and Rotation on page 9-51 and Tires

on page 9-38.

Notice: Liquid tire sealants

could damage the Tire Pressure

Monitor System (TPMS) sensors.

Sensor damage caused by

using a tire sealant is not covered

by your warranty. Do not use

liquid tire sealants.

Each TPMS sensor has a unique

identiﬁcation code. Any time

you replace one or more of the

TPMS sensors or rotate the

vehicle’s tires, the identiﬁcation

codes are automatically learned by

the TPMS. This occurs within a

few moments of driving the vehicle

over 19 mph (31 km/h).

9-50 Vehicle Service and Care

TPMS Malfunction Light

The TPMS will not function properly

if one or more of the TPMS

sensors are missing or inoperable.

When the system detects a

malfunction, the low tire warning

light ﬂashes for about one minute

and then stays on for the remainder

of the ignition cycle. Some of the

conditions that can cause the

malfunction light to come on are:

•One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. The

spare tire does not have a TPMS

sensor. The TPMS malfunction

light and DIC message should go

off once you re-install the road tire

containing the TPMS sensor.

•One or more TPMS sensors are

missing or damaged. The TPMS

malfunction light should go off

after the TPMS sensors are

installed and the vehicle is

driven for a few moments over

19 mph (31 km/h). See your

dealer/retailer for service.

•Replacement tires or wheels do

not match the vehicle’s original

equipment tires or wheels. Tires

and wheels other than those

recommended for the vehicle

could prevent the TPMS from

functioning properly. See Buying

New Tires on page 9-54.

•Operating electronic devices or

being near facilities using radio

wave frequencies similar to the

TPMS could cause the TPMS

sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning it

cannot detect or signal a low tire

condition. See your dealer/retailer

for service if the TPMS malfunction

light comes on and stays on.

Tire Inspection and

Rotation

Inspect tires regularly for signs of

wear or damage. Also inspect the

spare tire. For more information

on tire inspection, see When It Is

Time for New Tires on page 9-53.

Rotating vehicle tires helps them

to wear evenly and keeps the

vehicle performing like it did

when tires were new.

Rotate the tires and check

wheel alignment approximately

every 5,000 to 8,000 miles

(8 000 to 13 000 km) or when

unusual tire wear is noted.

See “Scheduled Maintenance”

in the Index of the “Limited

Warranty, Maintenance

and Owner Assistance

Information” manual for more

information. Also check the

wheels for damage, see Wheel

Replacement on page 9-58

for more information.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-51

Use this pattern when rotating

the vehicle tires. Do not include

the compact spare tire in the

tire rotation.

{CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or

on the parts to which it is

fastened, can make wheel

bolts become loose after

time. The wheel could come

off and cause a crash. When

you change a wheel, remove

any rust or dirt from places

where the wheel attaches to

the vehicle using a scraper

or wire brush.

Installing wheels with a good

metal-to-metal contact at

the mounting surfaces is

necessary to prevent wheel

bolts from becoming loose.

To prevent corrosion or rust

build-up, lightly coat the wheel

hub center and the cone-shaped

surface of each wheel bolt

with wheel bearing grease,

after a wheel change.

See Changing a Flat Tire on

page 9-60 for information

on installing the tire and wheel

assembly. Also see “Wheel

Bolt Torque” under Capacities

and Speciﬁcations on page 10-2.

Adjust the front and rear tires to

the recommended cold tire

inﬂation pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information

label. See Inﬂation - Tire

Pressure on page 9-46 and

Loading the Vehicle on

page 8-30.

9-52 Vehicle Service and Care

When It Is Time for

New Tires

Various factors, such as

maintenance, temperatures,

driving speeds, vehicle loading,

and road conditions inﬂuence

when you need new tires.

One way to tell when it is time for

new tires is to check the treadwear

indicators, which will appear when

the tires have only 1/16 inch

(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need new tires if any of the

following statements are true:

•You can see the indicators at

three or more places around

the tire.

•You can see cord or fabric

showing through the tire’s rubber.

•The tread or sidewall is cracked,

cut, or snagged deep enough to

show cord or fabric.

•The tire has a bump, bulge,

or split.

•The tire has a puncture, cut, or

other damage that cannot be

repaired well because of the size

or location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades over

time, even if they are not being

used. This is also true for the

spare tire, if the vehicle has one.

Multiple conditions affect how

fast this aging takes place, including

temperatures, loading conditions,

and inﬂation pressure maintenance.

With proper care and maintenance

tires typically wear out before

they degrade due to age. If you are

unsure about the need to replace

the tires as they get older, consult

the tire manufacturer for more

information.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-53

Buying New Tires

GM has developed and matched

speciﬁc tires for your vehicle.

The original equipment tires installed

on your vehicle, when it was new,

were designed to meet General

Motors Tire Performance Criteria

Speciﬁcation (TPC Spec) system

rating. If you need replacement

tires, GM strongly recommends

that you get tires with the same

TPC Spec rating. This way,

your vehicle will continue to have

tires that are designed to give

the same performance and vehicle

safety, during normal use, as

the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system

considers over a dozen critical

speciﬁcations that impact the

overall performance of your vehicle,

including brake system performance,

ride and handling, traction control,

and tire pressure monitoring

performance. GM’s TPC Spec

number is molded onto the tire’s

sidewall near the tire size. If the tires

have an all-season tread design,

the TPC Spec number will be

followed by an MS for mud and

snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on

page 9-40 for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tires

in sets of four. This is because

uniform tread depth on all tires will

help keep your vehicle performing

most like it did when the tires were

new. Replacing less than a full

set of tires can affect the braking

and handling performance of

your vehicle. See Tire Inspection

and Rotation on page 9-51 for

information on proper tire rotation.

{CAUTION

Mixing tires could cause you

to lose control while driving.

If you mix tires of different

sizes, brands, or types

(radial and bias-belted tires),

the vehicle may not handle

properly, and you could

have a crash. Using tires

of different sizes, brands,

or types may also cause

damage to the vehicle.

Be sure to use the correct

size, brand, and type of tires

on all wheels. It is all right

to drive with the compact

spare temporarily, as it was

developed for use on the

vehicle. See Compact Spare

Tire on page 9-67.

9-54 Vehicle Service and Care

{CAUTION

If you use bias-ply tires on

the vehicle, the wheel rim

ﬂanges could develop cracks

after many miles of driving.

A tire and/or wheel could fail

suddenly, causing a crash.

Use only radial-ply tires with

the wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s

tires with those that do not have

a TPC Spec number, make sure

they are the same size, load range,

speed rating, and construction type

(radial and bias-belted tires) as

your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure

monitoring system could give

an inaccurate low-pressure warning

if non-TPC Spec rated tires are

installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC

Spec rated tires may give a

low-pressure warning that is higher

or lower than the proper warning

level you would get with TPC Spec

rated tires. See Tire Pressure

Monitor System on page 9-48.

Your vehicle’s original equipment

tires are listed on the Tire and

Loading Information Label. See

Loading the Vehicle on page 8-30,

for more information about the

Tire and Loading Information Label

and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires

and Wheels

If you add wheels or tires that are

a different size than your original

equipment wheels and tires,

this may affect the way your vehicle

performs, including its braking,

ride and handling characteristics,

stability, and resistance to rollover.

Additionally, if your vehicle has

electronic systems such as, anti-lock

brakes, traction control, and

stability control, the performance of

these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION

If you add different sized

wheels, your vehicle may not

provide an acceptable level of

performance and safety if tires

not recommended for those

wheels are selected. You may

increase the chance that you

will crash and suffer serious

injury. Only use Saturn speciﬁc

wheel and tire systems

developed for your vehicle, and

have them properly installed by

a Saturn certiﬁed technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 9-54

and Accessories and Modiﬁcations

on page 9-3 for additional

information.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-55

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading

Quality grades can be found

where applicable on the tire

sidewall between tread shoulder

and maximum section width.

For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A

The following information relates

to the system developed by

the United States National

Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA), which

grades tires by treadwear,

traction, and temperature

performance. This applies only

to vehicles sold in the United

States. The grades are molded

on the sidewalls of most

passenger car tires. The Uniform

Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)

system does not apply to deep

tread, winter-type snow tires,

space-saver, or temporary

use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of

10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or

to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on

General Motors passenger cars

and light trucks may vary

with respect to these grades,

they must also conform to

federal safety requirements and

additional General Motors

Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)

standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a

comparative rating based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on

a speciﬁed government test

course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and

a half (1.5) times as well on the

government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative

performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and may

depart signiﬁcantly from the

norm due to variations in

driving habits, service practices,

and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

9-56 Vehicle Service and Care

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest

to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet

pavement as measured under

controlled conditions on

speciﬁed government test

surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may

have poor traction performance.

{WARNING

The traction grade assigned

to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not

include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are

A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance

to the generation of heat and

its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled

conditions on a speciﬁed indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause

the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life,

and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to

a level of performance which

all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard

No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory

test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

{WARNING

The temperature grade

for this tire is established

for a tire that is properly

inﬂated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed,

underinﬂation, or excessive

loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible

tire failure.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-57

Wheel Alignment and

Tire Balance

The tires and wheels on your

vehicle were aligned and balanced

carefully at the factory to give

you the longest tire life and best

overall performance. Adjustments to

wheel alignment and tire balancing

will not be necessary on a regular

basis. However, if you notice

unusual tire wear or your vehicle

pulling to one side or the other,

the alignment might need to

be checked. If you notice your

vehicle vibrating when driving on a

smooth road, the tires and wheels

might need to be rebalanced.

See your dealer/retailer for proper

diagnosis.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent,

cracked or badly rusted or corroded.

If the wheel bolts keep coming

loose, the wheel and wheel bolts

should be replaced. If the wheel

leaks air, replace it (except some

aluminum wheels, which can

sometimes be repaired). See your

dealer/retailer if any of these

conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the

kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the

same load-carrying capacity,

diameter, width, offset and be

mounted the same way as the one

it replaces.

If you need to replace any of the

wheels or wheel bolts, replace

them only with new GM original

equipment parts. This way, you will

be sure to have the right wheel

and wheel bolts for the vehicle.

{CAUTION

Using the wrong replacement

wheels or wheel bolts on your

vehicle can be dangerous.

It could affect the braking and

handling of the vehicle, make

the tires lose air and make you

lose control of the vehicle. You

could have a collision in which

you or others could be injured.

Always use the correct wheel

and wheel bolts for replacement.

9-58 Vehicle Service and Care

Notice: The wrong wheel can

also cause problems with bearing

life, brake cooling, speedometer

or odometer calibration,

headlamp aim, bumper height,

vehicle ground clearance, and tire

or tire chain clearance to the

body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on

page 9-60 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION

Putting a used wheel on the

vehicle is dangerous. You

cannot know how it has been

used or how far it has been

driven. It could fail suddenly

and cause a crash. If you have

to replace a wheel, use a new

GM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION

Do not use tire chains. There is

not enough clearance. Tire

chains used on a vehicle

without the proper amount of

clearance can cause damage to

the brakes, suspension or

other vehicle parts. The area

damaged by the tire chains

could cause you to lose control

of the vehicle and you or others

may be injured in a crash.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Use another type of traction

device only if its manufacturer

recommends it for use on

the vehicle and tire size

combination and road

conditions. Follow that

manufacturer’s instructions.

To help avoid damage to the

vehicle, drive slowly, readjust

or remove the device if it is

contacting the vehicle, and do

not spin the vehicle’s wheels.

If you do ﬁnd traction devices

that will ﬁt, install them on the

front tires.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-59

Tire Changing

If a Tire Goes Flat

It is unusual for a tire to blowout

while you are driving, especially if

you maintain your vehicle’s tires

properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is

much more likely to leak out slowly.

But if you should ever have a

blowout, here are a few tips about

what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the ﬂat tire creates

a drag that pulls the vehicle toward

that side. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal and grip the

steering wheel ﬁrmly. Steer to

maintain lane position, and then

gently brake to a stop well out of the

traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a

curve, acts much like a skid and

may require the same correction you

would use in a skid. In any rear

blowout remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle

under control by steering the

way you want the vehicle to go.

It may be very bumpy and noisy, but

you can still steer. Gently brake to

a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION

Lifting a vehicle and getting

under it to do maintenance or

repairs is dangerous without the

appropriate safety equipment

and training. The jack provided

with your vehicle is designed

only for changing a ﬂat tire. If it

is used for anything else, you or

others could be badly injured or

killed if the vehicle slips off the

jack. Use the jack provided with

your vehicle only for changing a

ﬂat tire.

If a tire goes ﬂat, the next part

shows how to use the jacking

equipment to change a ﬂat tire

safely.

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes ﬂat, avoid further tire

and wheel damage by driving slowly

to a level place. Turn on the

hazard warning ﬂashers.

{CAUTION

Changing a tire can be

dangerous. The vehicle can slip

off the jack and roll over or fall

on you or other people. You and

they could be badly injured or

even killed. Find a level place

to change your tire. To help

prevent the vehicle from

moving:

1. Set the parking brake

ﬁrmly.

2. Put an automatic

transmission shift lever in

P (Park), or shift a manual

transmission to 1 (First) or

R (Reverse).

(Continued)

9-60 Vehicle Service and Care

CAUTION (Continued)

3. Turn off the engine and

do not restart while the

vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to

remain in the vehicle.

To be certain the vehicle will

not move, put blocks at the

front and rear of the tire

farthest away from the one

being changed. That would be

the tire on the other side, at the

opposite end of the vehicle.

When you have a ﬂat tire, place the

wheel block at the tire diagonally

across from the ﬂat tire.

Removing the Spare Tire

and Tools

The equipment you will need is

located in the rear storage area.

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on

page 2-6.

2. Lift the ﬂoor cover to access the

spare tire and tools.

3. Remove the foam pad. Turn the

retainer counterclockwise to

remove it.

4. Remove the spare tire by pulling

it up and out of the trunk.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-61

5. The jack and tools are stored

below the spare tire.

6. The tools you will be using

include the jack (A), wheel

wrench (B) and jack handle (C).

Removing the Flat Tire

and Installing the

Spare Tire

1. If your vehicle has wheel covers,

remove the cover.

Do not try to put a wheel cover

on your compact spare tire. It will

not ﬁt. Store the wheel cover

in the trunk until you have the ﬂat

tire repaired or replaced.

Notice: Wheel covers will not ﬁt

on your vehicle’s compact spare.

If you try to put a wheel cover on

the compact spare, the cover or

the spare could be damaged.

2. If your vehicle has wheel bolt

caps, remove the caps. Store

the caps with the wheel cover.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen

all the wheel bolts. Do not

remove them yet.

9-62 Vehicle Service and Care

Notice: Make sure that the

jack lift head is in the correct

position or you may damage your

vehicle. The repairs would not

be covered by your warranty.

4. Position the jack lift head at the

jack location nearest the ﬂat

tire. The location is indicated by

a mark on the bottom edge

of the vehicle.

5. Put the compact spare tire

near you.

{CAUTION

Getting under a vehicle when

it is jacked up is dangerous.

If the vehicle slips off the jack,

you could be badly injured or

killed. Never get under a

vehicle when it is supported

only by a jack.

{CAUTION

Raising your vehicle with the

jack improperly positioned can

damage the vehicle and even

make the vehicle fall. To help

avoid personal injury and

vehicle damage, be sure to ﬁt

the jack lift head into the

proper location before raising

the vehicle.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-63

6. Raise the vehicle by turning the

jack handle clockwise. Raise the

vehicle far enough off the

ground so there is enough room

for the compact spare tire to

ﬁt under the vehicle.

7. Remove all of the wheel bolts.

{CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on

the parts to which it is

fastened, can make wheel bolts

become loose after time. The

wheel could come off and

cause an accident. When you

change a wheel, remove any

rust or dirt from places where

the wheel attaches to the

vehicle. In an emergency, you

can use a cloth or a paper

towel to do this; but be sure to

use a scraper or wire brush

later, if needed, to get all the

rust or dirt off. See Changing a

Flat Tire on page 9-60.

8. Remove any rust or dirt from the

wheel bolts, mounting surfaces

and spare wheel.

Installing wheels with a good

metal-to-metal contact at

the mounting surface is

necessary to prevent the wheel

bolts from becoming loose.

To prevent corrosion or rust

build-up, apply a light coat of

wheel bearing grease to the

wheel hub center and to the

cone-shaped surface of each

wheel bolt at every wheel change.

9-64 Vehicle Service and Care

9. Place the compact spare tire on

the wheel-mounting surface.

10. Reinstall the wheel bolts with

the rounded end of the bolts

toward the wheel. Tighten each

bolt by hand until the wheel

is held against the hub.

11. Lower the vehicle by turning the

jack handle counterclockwise.

Lower the jack completely.

12. Tighten the wheel bolts ﬁrmly

in a crisscross sequence,

as shown.

{CAUTION

Incorrect or improperly

tightened wheel bolts can

cause the wheel to come loose

and even come off. This could

lead to a crash. If you have to

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

replace them, be sure to get

new original equipment wheel

bolts. Stop somewhere as

soon as you can and have the

bolts tightened with a torque

wrench to the proper torque

speciﬁcation. See Capacities

and Speciﬁcations on

page 10-2 for wheel bolt

torque speciﬁcation.

Notice: Improperly tightened

wheel bolts can lead to brake

pulsation and rotor damage.

To avoid expensive brake repairs,

evenly tighten the wheel bolts

in the proper sequence and to

the proper torque speciﬁcation.

See Capacities and Speciﬁcations

on page 10-2 for the wheel bolt

torque speciﬁcation.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-65

Storing a Flat or Spare

Tire and Tools

{CAUTION

Storing a jack, a tire, or other

equipment in the passenger

compartment of the vehicle

could cause injury. In a

sudden stop or collision,

loose equipment could strike

someone. Store all these in

the proper place.

To store a ﬂat or spare tire and

tools, do the following:

A. Jack

B. Wheel Wrench

C. Jack Handle

1. Replace the jack and tools

as shown.

2. Place the ﬂat tire face down into

the spare tire hub.

3. Turn spare tire hold-down bolt by

turning clockwise. Return the

foam pad to its original position.

9-66 Vehicle Service and Care

4. Put the load ﬂoor back in place.

The compact spare tire is for

temporary use only. Replace the

compact spare with a full-size tire

as soon as possible.

Compact Spare Tire

Although the compact spare tire

was fully inﬂated when the vehicle

was new, it can lose air after

a time. Check the inﬂation

pressure regularly. It should be

60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare

on the vehicle, stop as soon

as possible and make sure the

spare tire is correctly inﬂated.

The compact spare is made to

perform well at speeds up to

50 mph (80 km/h) for distances

up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you

can ﬁnish your trip and have the

full-size tire repaired or replaced at

your convenience. Of course, it

is best to replace the spare with a

full-size tire as soon as possible.

The spare tire will last longer and

be in good shape in case it is

needed again.

Notice: When the compact

spare is installed, do not take

your vehicle through an

automatic car wash with guide

rails. The compact spare can get

caught on the rails. That can

damage the tire and wheel, and

maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on

other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare

tire or wheel with other wheels

or tires. They will not ﬁt. Keep the

spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not

ﬁt your compact spare. Using

them can damage your vehicle

and can damage the chains

too. Do not use tire chains on

your compact spare.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-67

Jump Starting

If your battery has run down, try to

use another vehicle and some

jumper cables to start your vehicle.

Be sure to use the following steps

to do it safely.

{CAUTION

Batteries can hurt you. They

can be dangerous because:

•They contain acid that can

burn you.

•They contain gas that can

explode or ignite.

•They contain enough

electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps

exactly, some or all of these

things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps

could result in costly damage to

your vehicle that would not

be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by

pushing or pulling it will not work,

and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must

have a 12-volt battery with a

negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s

system is not a 12-volt system

with a negative ground, both

vehicles can be damaged. Only

use vehicles with 12-volt systems

with negative grounds to jump

start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough

so the jumper cables can

reach, but be sure the vehicles

are not touching each other.

If they are, it could cause

a ground connection you do not

want. You would not be able

to start your vehicle, and the bad

grounding could damage the

electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the

vehicles rolling, set the parking

brake ﬁrmly on both vehicles

involved in the jump start

procedure. Put an automatic

transmission in PARK (P)

or a manual transmission in

NEUTRAL before setting

the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or

other accessories on during the

jump starting procedure, they

could be damaged. The repairs

would not be covered by your

warranty. Always turn off your

radio and other accessories when

jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both

vehicles. Unplug unnecessary

accessories plugged into the

cigarette lighter or the accessory

power outlet. Turn off the radio

and all lamps that are not needed.

This will avoid sparks and help

save both batteries. And it could

save the radio!

9-68 Vehicle Service and Care

4. Open the hoods and locate the

batteries. Find the positive (+)

and negative (−) terminal

locations on each vehicle. Your

vehicle’s positive (+) terminal

is identiﬁed by “+” sign on battery

case or terminal. Engine

Compartment Overview on

page 9-6.

{CAUTION

An electric fan can start up

even when the engine is not

running and can injure you.

Keep hands, clothing and tools

away from any underhood

electric fan.

{CAUTION

Using a match near a battery

can cause battery gas to

explode. People have been hurt

doing this, and some have been

blinded. Use a ﬂashlight if you

need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough

water. You do not need to add

water to the battery installed in

your new vehicle. But if a

battery has ﬁller caps, be sure

the right amount of ﬂuid is

there. If it is low, add water to

take care of that ﬁrst. If you

don’t, explosive gas could be

present.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Battery ﬂuid contains acid that

can burn you. Do not get it on

you. If you accidentally get it in

your eyes or on your skin, ﬂush

the place with water and get

medical help immediately.

{CAUTION

Fans or other moving engine

parts can injure you badly.

Keep your hands away from

moving parts once the engine

is running.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-69

5. Check that the jumper cables do

not have loose or missing

insulation. If they do, you could

get a shock. The vehicles

could be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,

here are some things you to

know. Positive (+) will go

to positive (+) or to a remote

positive (+) terminal if the vehicle

has one. Negative (−) will go

to the engine lift hook.

Do not connect positive (+) to

negative (−) or you will get

a short that would damage the

battery and maybe other parts

too. And do not connect the

negative (−) cable to the

negative (−) terminal on the

dead battery because this can

cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)

cable to the positive (+) terminal

of the dead battery. Use a

remote positive (+) terminal if

the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch

metal. Connect it to the

positive (+) terminal of the good

battery. Use a remote positive (+)

terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black

negative (−) cable to the

negative (−) terminal of the

good battery. Use a remote

negative (−) terminal if the vehicle

has one.

Do not let the other end touch

anything until the next step.

The other end of the negative (−)

cable does not go to the dead

battery.

9. Connect the other end of the

negative (−) cable at least

18 inches (45 cm) away from

the dead battery, but not

near engine parts that move.

Connect it to the engine lift hook.

You may need to scrape the

surface with your jumper cable

to obtain a proper ground.

The electrical connection is just

as good there, and the chance

of sparks getting back to the

battery is much less.

9-70 Vehicle Service and Care

10. Now start the vehicle with the

good battery and run the

engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had

the dead battery. If it will not

start after a few tries, it probably

needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are

connected or removed in the

wrong order, electrical shorting

may occur and damage the

vehicle. The repairs would not

be covered by your warranty.

Always connect and remove the

jumper cables in the correct

order, making sure that the cables

do not touch each other or

other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine

Part or Remote Negative (–)

Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote

Positive (+) and Remote

Negative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote

Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables

from both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−)

cable from the vehicle that had

the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−)

cable from the vehicle with the

good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)

cable from the vehicle with the

good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)

cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the caps over the

positive (+) and negative (–)

terminals to their original

positions.

Jumper Cable Removal

Vehicle Service and Care 9-71

Towing

Towing Your Vehicle

The vehicle was neither designed

nor intended to be towed with any of

its wheels on the ground.

Consult your dealer/retailer or a

professional towing service if

the disabled vehicle needs to be

towed. See Roadside Assistance

Program on page 11-5.

Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy

towing your vehicle may

cause damage because of

reduced ground clearance.

Always put your vehicle on a

ﬂatbed truck.

Recreational Vehicle

Towing

Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy

towing your vehicle may

cause damage because of

reduced ground clearance.

Always put your vehicle on a

ﬂatbed trailer.

The vehicle was neither designed

nor intended to be towed with any

of its wheels on the ground.

Towing a Trailer

The vehicle is neither designed nor

intended to tow a trailer.

Appearance Care

Interior Cleaning

Your vehicle’s interior will continue

to look its best if it is cleaned

often. Although not always visible,

dust and dirt can accumulate

on your upholstery. Dirt can damage

carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic

surfaces. Regular vacuuming

is recommended to remove particles

from the upholstery. It is important

to keep your upholstery from

becoming and remaining heavily

soiled. Soils should be removed as

quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s

interior may experience extremes of

heat that could cause stains to

set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require

more frequent cleaning. Use care

because newspapers and garments

that transfer color to your home

furnishings may also transfer color

to your vehicle’s interior.

9-72 Vehicle Service and Care

When cleaning your vehicle’s

interior, only use cleaners

speciﬁcally designed for the

surfaces being cleaned. Permanent

damage may result from using

cleaners on surfaces for which they

were not intended. Use glass

cleaner only on glass. Remove any

accidental over-spray from other

surfaces immediately. To prevent

over-spray, apply cleaner directly to

the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive

cleaners when cleaning glass

surfaces on your vehicle, you

could scratch the glass and/or

cause damage to the rear window

defogger. When cleaning the glass

on your vehicle, use only a soft

cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents

that may become concentrated in

your vehicle’s breathing space.

Before using cleaners, read and

adhere to all safety instructions on

the label. While cleaning your

vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate

ventilation by opening your

vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small

buttons and knobs using a small

brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has a product

for cleaning your vehicle’s glass.

You can also obtain a product from

your dealer/retailer to remove

odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using

the following cleaners or techniques:

•Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soil

from any interior surface.

•Never use a stiff brush. It can

cause damage to your vehicle’s

interior surfaces.

•Never apply heavy pressure or

rub aggressively with a cleaning

cloth. Use of heavy pressure

can damage the interior and does

not improve the effectiveness

of soil removal.

•Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.

Avoid laundry detergents or

dishwashing soaps with

degreasers. Using too much

soap will leave a residue

that leaves streaks and attracts

dirt. For liquid cleaners, about

20 drops per gallon (3.78 L)

of water is a good guide.

•Do not heavily saturate the

upholstery while cleaning.

•Damage to your vehicle’s interior

may result from the use of

many organic solvents such as

naptha, alcohol, etc.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-73

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft

brush attachment frequently to

remove dust and loose dirt.

A canister vacuum with a beater bar

in the nozzle may only be used

on ﬂoor carpet and carpeted ﬂoor

mats. For soils, always try to remove

them ﬁrst with plain water or club

soda. Before cleaning, gently

remove as much of the soil as

possible using one of the following

techniques:

•For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a paper towel.

Allow the soil to absorb into

the paper towel until no more

can be removed.

•For solid dry soils: remove as

much as possible and then

vacuum.

To clean, use the following

instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white

cloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess

moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the

soil and gently rub toward the

center. Continue cleaning, using

a clean area of the cloth each

time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled

area until the cleaning cloth

remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely

removed, use a mild soap

solution and repeat the cleaning

process that was used with

plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a

commercial fabric cleaner or

spot lifter may be necessary.

When a commercial upholstery

cleaner or spot lifter is to be used,

test a small hidden area for

colorfastness ﬁrst. If the locally

cleaned area gives any impression

that a ring formation may result,

clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been

completed, a paper towel can be

used to blot excess moisture

from the fabric or carpet.

Leather

A soft cloth dampened with water

can be used to remove dust.

If a more thorough cleaning is

necessary, a soft cloth dampened

with a mild soap solution can be

used. Allow the leather to dry

naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

Never use steam to clean leather.

Never use spot lifters or spot

removers on leather. Many

commercial leather cleaners and

coatings that are sold to preserve

and protect leather may permanently

9-74 Vehicle Service and Care

change the appearance and feel

of your leather and are not

recommended. Do not use silicone

or wax-based products, or those

containing organic solvents to clean

your vehicle’s interior because they

can alter the appearance by

increasing the gloss in a non-uniform

manner. Never use shoe polish on

leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces

A soft cloth dampened with water

may be used to remove dust.

If a more thorough cleaning is

necessary, a clean soft cloth

dampened with a mild soap solution

can be used to gently remove

dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters

or removers on plastic surfaces.

Many commercial cleaners and

coatings that are sold to preserve

and protect soft plastic surfaces may

permanently change the appearance

and feel of your interior and are

not recommended. Do not use

silicone or wax-based products, or

those containing organic solvents to

clean your vehicle’s interior

because they can alter the

appearance by increasing the gloss

in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may

increase gloss on your instrument

panel. The increase in gloss

may cause annoying reﬂections in

the windshield and even make

it difficult to see through the

windshield under certain conditions.

Exterior Cleaning

Cleaning Exterior

Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water,

a soft cloth and a car washing soap

to clean exterior lamps and lenses.

Follow instructions under “Washing

Your Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishing

of your vehicle by hand may be

necessary to remove residue from

the paint ﬁnish. You can get

approved cleaning products from

your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle

Care/Appearance Materials

on page 9-80.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-75

If your vehicle has a basecoat/

clearcoat paint ﬁnish, the clearcoat

gives more depth and gloss to

the colored basecoat. Always use

waxes and polishes that are

non-abrasive and made for a

basecoat/clearcoat paint ﬁnish.

Notice: Machine compounding

or aggressive polishing on a

basecoat/clearcoat paint ﬁnish

may damage it. Use only

non-abrasive waxes and polishes

that are made for a basecoat/

clearcoat paint ﬁnish on your

vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium

chloride and other salts, ice

melting agents, road oil and tar,

tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals

from industrial chimneys, etc.,

can damage your vehicle’s ﬁnish if

they remain on painted surfaces.

Wash the vehicle as soon as

possible. If necessary, use

non-abrasive cleaners that are

marked safe for painted surfaces to

remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are

subject to aging, weather and

chemical fallout that can take their

toll over a period of years. You

can help to keep the paint ﬁnish

looking new by keeping your vehicle

garaged or covered whenever

possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright

Metal Parts

Bright metal parts should be

cleaned regularly to keep their

luster. Wash with water or

use chrome polish on chrome or

stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim.

To avoid damaging protective

trim, never use auto or chrome

polish, steam or caustic soap

to clean aluminum. A coating of

wax, rubbed to high polish, is

recommended for all bright

metal parts.

Washing Your Vehicle

The best way to preserve your

vehicle’s ﬁnish is to keep it clean by

washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight. Use a car washing soap.

Notice: Certain cleaners contain

chemicals that can damage the

emblems or nameplates on your

vehicle. Check the cleaning

product label. If it states that it

should not be used on plastic

parts, do not use it on your vehicle

or damage may occur and it would

not be covered by the warranty.

Do not use cleaning agents that are

petroleum based or that contain

acid or abrasives, as they can

damage the paint, metal or plastic

on your vehicle. Approved cleaning

products can be obtained from

your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle

Care/Appearance Materials on

9-76 Vehicle Service and Care

page 9-80. Follow all manufacturers’

directions regarding correct

product usage, necessary safety

precautions and appropriate

disposal of any vehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, before

washing and after to remove all

cleaning agents completely. If they

are allowed to dry on the surface,

they could stain.

Dry the ﬁnish with a soft, clean

chamois or an all-cotton towel to

avoid surface scratches and

water spotting.

High pressure car washes may

cause water to enter the vehicle.

Avoid using high pressure washes

closer than 12 inches (30 cm)

to the surface of the vehicle.

Use of power washers exceeding

1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result

in damage or removal of paint

and decals.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will

make them last longer, seal better,

and not stick or squeak. Apply

silicone grease with a clean cloth.

During very cold, damp weather

frequent application may be required.

See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the

Index of the “Maintenance and

Warranty and Owner assistance

Information” manual.

Wheels and Trim — Aluminum

or Chrome

Your vehicle may have either

aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft

clean cloth with mild soap and water.

Rinse with clean water. After rinsing

thoroughly, dry with a soft clean

towel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and

other chrome trim may be

damaged if you do not wash your

vehicle after driving on roads

that have been sprayed with

magnesium, calcium or sodium

chloride. These chlorides are

used on roads for conditions

such as ice and dust. Always

wash your vehicle’s chrome with

soap and water after exposure.

Notice: If you use strong soaps,

chemicals, abrasive polishes,

cleaners, brushes, or cleaners

that contain acid on aluminum or

chrome-plated wheels, you

could damage the surface of the

wheel(s). The repairs would

not be covered by your warranty.

Use only approved cleaners on

aluminum or chrome-plated

wheels.

The surface of these wheels is

similar to the painted surface of your

vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,

chemicals, abrasive polishes,

abrasive cleaners, cleaners with

acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes

on them because you could damage

the surface. Do not use chrome

polish on aluminum wheels.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-77

Notice: Using chrome polish on

aluminum wheels could damage

the wheels. The repairs would not

be covered by your warranty.

Use chrome polish on chrome

wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on

chrome-plated wheels, but avoid

any painted surface of the wheel,

and buff off immediately after

application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle

through an automatic car wash

that has silicone carbide tire

cleaning brushes, you could

damage the aluminum or

chrome-plated wheels. The repairs

would not be covered by your

warranty. Never drive a vehicle

equipped with aluminum or

chrome-plated wheels through an

automatic car wash that uses

silicone carbide tire cleaning

brushes.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshield

with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint

free cloth or paper towel soaked

with windshield washer ﬂuid or

a mild detergent. Wash the

windshield thoroughly when cleaning

the blades. Bugs, road grime,

sap, and a buildup of vehicle

wash/wax treatments may cause

wiper streaking. Replace the

wiper blades if they are worn or

damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

•Extreme dusty conditions

•Sand and salt

•Heat and sun

•Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Tires

To clean the tires, use a stiff brush

with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based

tire dressing products on your

vehicle may damage the paint

ﬁnish and/or tires. When applying

a tire dressing, always wipe off

any overspray from all painted

surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and

requires sheet metal repair or

replacement, make sure the body

repair shop applies anti-corrosion

material to parts repaired or replaced

to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement

parts will provide the corrosion

protection while maintaining

the vehicle warranty.

9-78 Vehicle Service and Care

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deep

scratches in the ﬁnish should be

repaired right away. Bare metal will

corrode quickly and may develop

into major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be

repaired with touch-up materials

available from your dealer/retailer.

Larger areas of ﬁnish damage

can be corrected in your dealer’s/

retailer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snow

removal and dust control can collect

on the underbody. If these are not

removed, corrosion and rust can

develop on the underbody parts such

as fuel lines, frame, ﬂoor pan, and

exhaust system even though they

have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, ﬂush these

materials from the underbody

with plain water. Clean any areas

where mud and debris can collect.

Dirt packed in close areas of

the frame should be loosened before

being ﬂushed. Your dealer/retailer

or an underbody car washing

system can do this for you.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmospheric

conditions can create a chemical

fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall

upon and attack painted surfaces on

the vehicle. This damage can take

two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped

discolorations, and small, irregular

dark spots etched into the paint

surface.

Although no defect in the paint job

causes this, we will repair, at no

charge to the owner, the surfaces of

new vehicles damaged by this

fallout condition within 12 months

or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of

purchase, whichever occurs ﬁrst.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-79

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior polishing cloth.

Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil, and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome or stainless steel.

White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks from

whitewalls and raised white lettering.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, smoke and

ﬁngerprints.

Chrome Wheel Cleaner Removes dirt and grime from

chrome wheels.

Finish Enhancer Removes dust, ﬁngerprints, and

surface contaminants. Spray on and

wipe off.

Swirl Remover Polish Removes swirl marks, ﬁne scratches,

and other light surface

contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and

protects ﬁnish.

9-80 Vehicle Service and Care

Description Usage

Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss Cleans, shines, and protects tires.

No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate Medium foaming shampoo. Cleans

and lightly waxes. Biodegradable

and phosphate free.

Spot Lifter Quickly removes spots and stains

from carpets, vinyl, and cloth

upholstery.

Odor Eliminator Odorless spray odor eliminator used

on fabrics, vinyl, leather and carpet.

Vehicle Service and Care 9-81

✍NOTES

9-82 Vehicle Service and Care

Technical Data

Vehicle Identiﬁcation

Number (VIN) ..................10-1

Service Parts

Identiﬁcation Label ...........10-1

Capacities and

Speciﬁcations

Capacities and

Speciﬁcations ..................10-2

Vehicle Identiﬁcation

Number (VIN)

This is the legal identiﬁer for your

vehicle. It appears on a plate in the

front corner of the instrument panel,

on the driver side. It can be seen

through the windshield from outside

the vehicle. The VIN also appears on

the Vehicle Certiﬁcation and Service

Parts labels and the certiﬁcates of

title and registration.

Engine Identiﬁcation

The eighth character in the VIN is

the engine code. This code helps

identify the vehicle’s engine,

speciﬁcations, and replacement

parts. See “Engine Speciﬁcations”

under Capacities and Speciﬁcations

on page 10-2 for your vehicle’s

engine code.

Service Parts

Identiﬁcation Label

This label is on the trunk ﬂoor.

It is very helpful if you ever need

to order parts. The label has

the following information:

•Vehicle Identiﬁcation

Number (VIN)

•Model designation

•Paint information

•Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from the

vehicle.

Technical Data 10-1

Capacities and Speciﬁcations

The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the

index of the “Limited Warranty, Maintenance and Owner Assistance Information” manual.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge

amount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.

Cooling System

Automatic Transmission 6.2 qt 5.9 L

Manual Transmission 7.3 qt 6.9 L

Engine Oil with Filter 4.8 qt 4.5 L

Fuel Tank 11.9 gal 45.0 L

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission 4.2 qt 4.0 L

Manual Transmission 1.6 qt 1.5 L

Wheel Bolt Torque 81 lb ft 110 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to ﬁll to the approximate level, as recommended in this

manual.

10-2 Technical Data

Engine Speciﬁcations

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.8L L4 1 Automatic

Manual 0.035 in (0.90 mm)

Technical Data 10-3

✍NOTES

10-4 Technical Data

Customer

Information

Customer Information

Customer Satisfaction

Procedure .......................11-1

Online Owner Center ........11-4

Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY)

Users ..............................11-4

Customer Assistance

Offices ............................11-5

GM Mobility

Reimbursement

Program ..........................11-5

Roadside Assistance

Program ..........................11-5

Scheduling Service

Appointments ..................11-8

Courtesy Transportation ....11-8

Collision Damage

Repair ...........................11-10

Reporting Safety Defects

to the United States

Government ...................11-13

Reporting Safety Defects

to the Canadian

Government ...................11-14

Reporting Safety Defects

to Saturn .......................11-14

Service Publications

Ordering Information ......11-14

Vehicle Data Recording

and Privacy

Vehicle Data Recording

and Privacy ...................11-15

Event Data Recorders .....11-16

OnStar

..........................11-17

Navigation System ...........11-17

Radio Frequency

Identiﬁcation (RFID) .......11-17

Customer Information

Customer Satisfaction

Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are

important to your retailer and to

Saturn. Together we are committed

to providing our customers with

unparalleled service, before, during,

and after the purchase of a

Saturn vehicle, for total customer

satisfaction. We call this the Saturn

Difference. Normally, any concerns

with the sales transaction or the

operation of the vehicle are resolved

by the retailer’s sales or service

departments. If, for any reason, your

ownership experience falls below

your expectations, we suggest

you take the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the Retail

Customer Assistance Liaison. Any

member of the retail management

team has the authority and the

desire to resolve your concerns.

Normally, concerns can be quickly

resolved at this level.

Customer Information 11-1

STEP TWO: Should you need

additional assistance, in the U.S.,

contact the Saturn Customer

Assistance Center by calling

1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call the

Saturn Customer Communication

Centre at 1-800-263-1999. A Saturn

Customer Assistance Center team

member will handle your call and

assist in providing product and

warranty information, the nearest

retailer location, roadside assistance,

brochures, literature and discuss any

concerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-free

number in order to give your inquiry

prompt attention. Please have the

following information available to

give the Customer Assistance

Representative:

•Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number

(VIN). This 17-digit number

can be found on the vehicle

registration or title, on the

upper driver side corner of the

instrument panel, or on your

roadside assistance key card.

•The name of your selling and

servicing retail facility.

•Vehicle delivery date and present

mileage.

•Your daytime and evening phone

numbers.

When contacting Saturn, please

remember that your concern

will likely be resolved at a retailer’s

facility. That is why we suggest

you follow Step One ﬁrst.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners):

Both Saturn and its retailers are

committed to making sure you are

completely satisﬁed with your Saturn

vehicle. However, if you continue to

remain unsatisﬁed after following the

procedure outlined in Steps One and

Two, Saturn and its retailers offer

the additional assistance of a

neutral party through our voluntary

participation in a mediation/

arbitration program called Better

Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an

out-of-court program administered

by the Council of Better Business

Bureaus to settle automotive

disputes regarding vehicle repairs or

the interpretation of the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. This program is

available at no cost to you, our

customer.

Although you may be required to

resort to this informal dispute

resolution program prior to ﬁling a

court action, use of the program is

free of charge and your case is

generally heard within 40 days. If you

do not agree with the decision given

in your case, you can reject it and

proceed with any other venue for

relief available to you.

11-2 Customer Information

Contact the BBB Auto Line Program

by using the toll-free telephone

number or by writing them at the

following address:

BBB Auto Line Program

Council of Better Business

Bureaus, Inc.

4200 Wilson Boulevard

Suite 800

Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in

all 50 states and the District of

Columbia. Eligibility is limited by

vehicle age, mileage and other

factors. Saturn Corporation reserves

the right to change eligibility

limitations and/or discontinue its

participation in this program.

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in

the Mediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feel

your concerns have been addressed

after following the procedure outlined

in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of

Canada Limited has committed to

binding arbitration of owner disputes

involving factory-related vehicle

service claims. The program

provides for the review of the facts

involved by an impartial third party

arbiter, and may include an informal

hearing before the arbiter. The

program is designed so that the

entire dispute settlement process,

from the time you ﬁle your complaint

to the ﬁnal decision, should be

completed in approximately 70 days.

We believe our impartial program

offers advantages over courts in

most jurisdictions because it is

informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning

eligibility in the Canadian Motor

Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),

call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.

Alternatively, you may call the

Saturn Customer Communication

Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or you

may write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Program

c/o Customer Communication

Centre

General Motors of Canada Limited

Mail Code: CA1-163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompanied

by the Vehicle Identiﬁcation

Number (VIN).

Customer Information 11-3

Online Owner Center

(United States only)

This is a resource for your Saturn

ownership needs. Speciﬁc vehicle

information can be found in one

place.

The Online Owner Center allows

you to:

•Get e-mail service reminders.

•Access information about

your speciﬁc vehicle, including

tips and videos and an electronic

version of this owner manual.

•Keep track of your vehicle’s

service history and maintenance

schedule.

•Find Saturn retailers for service

nationwide.

•Receive special promotions and

privileges only available to

members.

Refer to saturn.com on the web for

updated information and to

My GM Canada (Canada only)

My GM Canada is a

password-protected section of

gmcanada.com where you can save

information on GM vehicles, get

personalized offers, and use handy

tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools

and services you will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles and

current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details

such as address and phone

number for each of your preferred

GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service

reminders and helpful advice on

owning and maintaining your

vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your

proﬁle, subscribe to E-News

and use tools and forms with

greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canada

section within gmcanada.com.

Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY)

Users

To assist owners who have hearing

difficulties, Saturn has installed

special TDD (Telecommunication

Devices for the Deaf) equipment in

its Saturn Customer Assistance

Center.

Any hearing or speech-impaired

customer who has access to a TDD

or to a conventional Text Telephone

(TTY) can communicate with

Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000.

TTY users in Canada may dial

1-800-263-3830.

11-4 Customer Information

Customer Assistance

Offices

Saturn encourages customers

to call the toll-free number for

assistance. If a customer wishes to

write to Saturn, the letter should

be addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance Center

100 Saturn Parkway

Mail Code 371-999-S24

Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

1-800-553-6000

1-800-833-6000 (For Text

Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance:

1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication

Centre

General Motors of Canada Ltd.

CA1-163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

gmcanada.com

1-800-263-1999

1-800-263-3830 (For Text

Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance:

1-800-268-6800

GM Mobility

Reimbursement Program

This program, available to qualiﬁed

applicants, can reimburse you up to

$1,000 toward eligible aftermarket

driver or passenger adaptive

equipment you may require for

your vehicle such as hand controls,

wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limited

period of time from the date of

vehicle purchase/lease.

For more details, or to determine

your vehicle’s eligibility, visit

your Saturn retailer or call the

Saturn Customer Assistance Center

at 1-800-553-6000. Text telephone

(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may call the

Saturn Customer Communication

Centre at 1-800-263-1999.

TTY users in Canada may call

1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance

Program

For vehicles purchased in the

U.S., call 1-800-553-6000; (Text

Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438).

For vehicles purchased in Canada,

call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,

365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Saturn

vehicle, you are automatically

enrolled in the Saturn Roadside

Assistance Program.

Customer Information 11-5

Who is Covered?

Roadside Assistance coverage is for

the vehicle operator, regardless of

ownership. In Canada, a person

driving this vehicle without the

consent of the owner is not eligible

for coverage.

Services Provided

The following services are provided

in the U.S. and Canada up to

5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),

whichever comes ﬁrst, and, in

Canada only, up to a maximum

of $100.

•Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough

fuel for the vehicle to get to

the nearest service station

(approximately $5 Canada).

In Canada, service to provide

diesel may be restricted. For

safety reasons, propane and

other alternative fuels are not

provided through this service.

•Lock-Out Service: Lock-out

service is covered at no charge if

you are unable to gain entry into

your vehicle. A remote unlock

may be available if you have an

active OnStar

subscription.

To ensure security, the driver

must present personal

identiﬁcation before lock-out

service is provided. In Canada,

the vehicle registration is also

required.

•Emergency Tow From a Public

Roadway or Highway: Tow to

the nearest Saturn retailer for

warranty service or in the event

of a vehicle-disabling crash.

Winch-out assistance is provided

when the vehicle is mired in sand,

mud, or snow.

•Flat Tire Change: Installation of a

spare tire in good condition, when

equipped and properly inﬂated,

is covered at no charge.

The customer is responsible for

the repair or replacement of the

tire if not covered by a

warrantable failure.

•Jump Start: A battery jump start

is covered at no charge if the

vehicle does not start.

•Trip Routing Service (Canada

Only): Upon request, Roadside

Assistance will send you detailed,

computer personalized maps,

highlighting your choice of either

the most direct route or the most

scenic route to your destination,

anywhere in North America, along

with helpful travel information

pertaining to your trip.

Please allow three weeks before

your planned departure date.

Trip routing requests are limited

to six per calendar year.

11-6 Customer Information

•Trip Interruption Beneﬁts and

Assistance (Canada Only): In

the event of a warranty related

vehicle disablement, while en

route and over 250 kilometres

from the original point of

departure, you might qualify

for trip interruption expense

assistance. This assistance

covers reasonable reimbursement

of up to a maximum of $500

(Canadian) for (A) meals

(maximum of $50/day), (B)

lodging (maximum of $100/night),

and (C) alternate ground

transportation (maximum of

$40/day). This beneﬁt is to assist

you with some of the unplanned

expense you may incur while

waiting for your vehicle to be

repaired.

Pre-authorization, original

detailed receipts, and a copy of

the repair order are required.

Once authorization has been

given, your advisor will help

you make any necessary

arrangements and explain how

to claim for trip interruption

expense assistance.

•Alternative Service (Canada

Only): There could be times

when Roadside Assistance

cannot provide timely assistance.

Your advisor may authorize

you to secure local emergency

road service, and you will be

reimbursed up to $100 upon

submission of the original receipt

to Roadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical

failures may be covered. However,

any cost for parts and labor for

non-warranty repairs are the

responsibility of the driver.

Saturn and General Motors of

Canada Limited reserve the right to

limit services or reimbursement to an

owner or driver when, in their sole

discretion, the claims become

excessive in frequency or type of

occurrence.

Calling for Assistance

For prompt and efficient assistance

when calling, please provide the

following to the Roadside Assistance

Representatives:

•Your name, home address, and

home telephone number

•Telephone number of your

location

•Location of the vehicle

•Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle

•Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identiﬁcation Number (VIN) and

delivery date of the vehicle

•Description of the problem

Customer Information 11-7

Towing and Road Service

Exclusions

Speciﬁcally excluded from Roadside

Assistance coverage are towing

or services for vehicles operated on

a non-public roadway or highway,

ﬁnes, impound towing caused

by a violation of local, Municipal,

State, Provincial or Federal law, and

mounting, dismounting or changing

of snow tires, chains, or other

traction devices.

Roadside Assistance is not part

of or included in the coverage

provided by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Saturn and General

Motors of Canada Limited reserve

the right to make any changes or

discontinue the Roadside Assistance

program at any time without

notiﬁcation.

Scheduling Service

Appointments

When your vehicle requires warranty

service, contact your dealer/retailer

and request an appointment. By

scheduling a service appointment

and advising your service consultant

of your transportation needs, your

dealer/retailer can help minimize

your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled

into the service department

immediately, keep driving it until

it can be scheduled for service,

unless, of course, the problem is

safety-related. If it is, please call your

dealership/retailer, let them know

this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you to

bring the vehicle for service, you

are urged to do so as early in

the work day as possible to allow

for the same day repair.

Courtesy Transportation

To enhance your ownership

experience, we and our participating

retailers are proud to offer Courtesy

Transportation, a customer support

program for vehicles with the Bumper

to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage

period in Canada) and extended

powertrain warranty in both the U.S.

and Canada.

Several courtesy transportation

options are available to assist

in reducing your inconvenience

when warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a

part of the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. A separate booklet

entitled “Warranty and Owner

Assistance Information” furnished

with each new vehicle provides

detailed warranty coverage

information.

11-8 Customer Information

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally

be completed while you wait.

However, if you are unable to wait,

Saturn helps to minimize your

inconvenience by providing several

transportation options. Depending on

the circumstances, your retailer can

offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferred

means of offering Courtesy

Transportation. Retailers may

provide you with shuttle service to

get you to your destination with

minimal interruption of your daily

schedule. This includes one-way or

round trip shuttle service within

reasonable time and distance

parameters of the retailer’s area.

Public Transportation or Fuel

Reimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnight

warranty repairs, and public

transportation is used instead of

the retailer’s shuttle service, the

expense must be supported by

original receipts and can only be up

to the maximum amount allowed by

Saturn for shuttle service. In addition,

for U.S. customers, should you

arrange transportation through

a friend or relative, limited

reimbursement for reasonable

fuel expenses may be available.

Claim amounts should reﬂect actual

costs and be supported by original

receipts. See your retailer for

information regarding the allowance

amounts for reimbursement of fuel

or other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your retailer may arrange to provide

you with a courtesy rental vehicle or

reimburse you for a rental vehicle

that you obtain if your vehicle is kept

for an overnight warranty repair.

Rental reimbursement will be limited

and must be supported by original

receipts. This requires that you sign

and complete a rental agreement

and meet state/provincial, local, and

rental vehicle provider requirements.

Requirements vary and may include

minimum age requirements,

insurance coverage, credit card,

etc. You are responsible for fuel

usage charges and may also be

responsible for taxes, levies, usage

fees, excessive mileage, or rental

usage beyond the completion of the

repair.

It may not be possible to provide a

like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Customer Information 11-9

Additional Program

Information

All program options, such as shuttle

service, may not be available at

every retailer. Please contact your

retailer for speciﬁc information

about availability. All Courtesy

Transportation arrangements will

be administered by appropriate

retailer personnel.

Saturn reserves the right to

unilaterally modify, change or

discontinue Courtesy Transportation

at any time and to resolve all

questions of claim eligibility pursuant

to the terms and conditions

described herein at its sole

discretion.

Collision Damage Repair

If your vehicle is involved in a

collision and it is damaged, have

the damage repaired by a qualiﬁed

technician using the proper

equipment and quality replacement

parts. Poorly performed collision

repairs diminish your vehicle’s resale

value, and safety performance can

be compromised in subsequent

collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are new

parts made with the same materials

and construction methods as the

parts with which your vehicle was

originally built. Genuine GM Collision

parts are your best choice to ensure

that your vehicle’s designed

appearance, durability, and safety

are preserved. The use of Genuine

GM parts can help maintain your

GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts

may also be used for repair. These

parts are typically removed from

vehicles that were total losses in

prior crashes. In most cases, the

parts being recycled are from

undamaged sections of the vehicle.

A recycled original equipment GM

part, may be an acceptable choice to

maintain your vehicle’s originally

designed appearance and safety

performance, however, the history of

these parts is not known. Such parts

are not covered by your GM New

Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any

related failures are not covered by

that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are

also available. These are made

by companies other than GM and

may not have been tested for

your vehicle. As a result, these

parts may ﬁt poorly, exhibit

premature durability/corrosion

problems, and may not perform

properly in subsequent collisions.

11-10 Customer Information

Aftermarket parts are not covered

by your GM New Vehicle Limited

Warranty, and any vehicle failure

related to such parts are not covered

by that warranty.

Repair Facility

We recommend that you choose a

collision repair facility that meets

your needs before you ever need

collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer

may have a collision repair center

with GM-trained technicians and

state of the art equipment, or be

able to recommend a collision

repair center that has GM-trained

technicians and comparable

equipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GM

vehicle with comprehensive and

collision insurance coverage.

There are signiﬁcant differences in

the quality of coverage afforded

by various insurance policy terms.

Many insurance policies provide

reduced protection to your GM

vehicle by limiting compensation for

damage repairs by using aftermarket

collision parts. Some insurance

companies will not specify

aftermarket collision parts.

When purchasing insurance, we

recommend that you assure your

vehicle will be repaired with GM

original equipment collision parts.

If such insurance coverage is not

available from your current insurance

carrier, consider switching to another

insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing

company may require you to have

insurance that assures repairs with

Genuine GM Original Equipment

Manufacturer (OEM) parts or

Genuine Manufacturer replacement

parts. Read your lease carefully, as

you may be charged at the end of

your lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

Here is what to do if you are

involved in a crash.

•Check to make sure that you are

all right. If you are uninjured,

make sure that no one else in

your vehicle, or the other vehicle,

is injured.

•If there has been an injury, call

emergency services for help.

Do not leave the scene of a

crash until all matters have been

taken care of. Move your vehicle

only if its position puts you in

danger or you are instructed to

move it by a police officer.

•Give only the necessary and

requested information to police

and other parties involved in

the crash. Do not discuss your

personal condition, mental frame

of mind, or anything unrelated to

the crash. This will help guard

against post-crash legal action.

Customer Information 11-11

•If you need roadside assistance,

call GM Roadside Assistance.

See Roadside Assistance

Program on page 11-5 for more

information.

•If your vehicle cannot be driven,

know where the towing service

will be taking it. Get a card from

the tow truck operator or write

down the driver’s name, the

service’s name, and the phone

number.

•Remove any valuables from your

vehicle before it is towed away.

Make sure this includes your

insurance information and

registration if you keep these

items in your vehicle.

•Gather the important information

you will need from the other

driver. Things like name, address,

phone number, driver’s license

number, vehicle license plate,

vehicle make, model and model

year, Vehicle Identiﬁcation

Number (VIN), insurance

company and policy number, and

a general description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

•If possible, call your insurance

company from the scene of the

crash. They will walk you through

the information they will need. If

they ask for a police report, phone

or go to the police department

headquarters the next day and

you can get a copy of the report

for a nominal fee. In some

states/provinces with “no fault”

insurance laws, a report may not

be necessary. This is especially

true if there are no injuries and

both vehicles are drivable.

•Choose a reputable collision

repair facility for your vehicle.

Whether you select a dealer/

retailer or a private collision repair

facility to ﬁx the damage, make

sure you are comfortable with

them. Remember, you will have to

feel comfortable with their work for

a long time.

•Once you have an estimate, read

it carefully and make sure you

understand what work will be

performed on your vehicle. If you

have a question, ask for an

explanation. Reputable shops

welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage

Repair Process

In the event that your vehicle

requires damage repairs, GM

recommends that you take an

active role in its repair. If you have

a pre-determined repair facility of

choice, take your vehicle there, or

have it towed there. Specify to the

facility that any required replacement

collision parts be original equipment

parts, either new Genuine GM parts

or recycled original GM parts.

Remember, recycled parts will not

be covered by your GM vehicle

warranty.

11-12 Customer Information

Insurance pays the bill for the

repair, but you must live with

the repair. Depending on your policy

limits, your insurance company

may initially value the repair using

aftermarket parts. Discuss this

with your repair professional,

and insist on Genuine GM parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leased

you may be obligated to have

the vehicle repaired with Genuine

GM parts, even if your insurance

coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance

company is paying for the repairs,

you are not obligated to accept a

repair valuation based on that

insurance company’s collision

policy repair limits, as you have no

contractual limits with that company.

In such cases, you can have control

of the repair and parts choices as

long as cost stays within reasonable

limits.

Reporting Safety

Defects

Reporting Safety Defects

to the United States

Government

If you believe that your vehicle

has a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA), in addition to notifying

Saturn Corporation.

If NHTSA receives similar

complaints, it could open an

investigation, and if it ﬁnds that

a safety defect exists in a group

of vehicles, it could order a

recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot

become involved in individual

problems between you, your

retailer or Saturn Corporation.

To contact NHTSA, call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free

at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); go to

safercar.gov; or

write to:

Administrator, NHTSA

1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.

Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain other

information about motor

vehicle safety from

safercar.gov.

Customer Information 11-13

Reporting Safety Defects

to the Canadian

Government

If you live in Canada, and you

believe that your vehicle has

a safety defect, notify Transport

Canada immediately, in addition to

notifying General Motors of

Canada Limited. Call them at

1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport Canada

Road Safety Branch

2780 Sheffield Road

Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects

to Saturn

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or

Transport Canada) in a situation like

this, please notify Saturn.

Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation

100 Saturn Parkway

Mail Drop 371-999-S24

Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or

write:

Saturn Customer Communication

Centre

General Motors of Canada Limited

CA1-163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications

Ordering Information

Service Manuals

A variety of publications are

available to you. Saturn service

manuals are written for trained

technicians, and in some cases,

specialized tools and equipment are

necessary to complete certain

repairs. However, the manuals are

available to owners who either

have the training, or wish to gain a

greater understanding of the

technical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publications

information or to order publications

in the United States, call toll

free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit

www.saturn-publications.com to

order on-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manuals

are available by calling toll free

1-800-551-4123.

11-14 Customer Information

Owner Publications

Information on how to obtain

product bulletins and as described

below is applicable only in the

ﬁfty U.S. states and the District

of Columbia, and only for cars and

light trucks with a Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) less

than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg).

Copies of individual bulletins

are also at your participating Saturn

retailer. You can ask to see them.

In Canada, information relating

to product service bulletins can

be obtained by contacting your

Saturn retailer.

Service Bulletins

Saturn regularly sends its retailers

useful service bulletins about Saturn

products. Saturn monitors product

performance in the ﬁeld. We then

prepare bulletins for servicing our

products better. You can get these

bulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects.

Some pertain to the proper use and

care of your vehicle. Some describe

costly repairs. Others describe

inexpensive repairs which, if done on

time with the latest parts, may avoid

future costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician how

to repair a new or unexpected

condition. Others describe a quicker

way to ﬁx your vehicle. They can

help a technician service your

vehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditions

affecting a small number of vehicles.

Your Saturn retailer or a qualiﬁed

technician may have to determine

if a speciﬁc bulletin applies to

your vehicle. To order Saturn

bulletins, call Saturn Publications

at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit

saturn-publications.com to order

online.

Vehicle Data

Recording and

Privacy

Your Saturn vehicle has a number of

sophisticated computers that record

information about the vehicle’s

performance and how it is driven.

For example, your vehicle uses

computer modules to monitor and

control engine and transmission

performance, to monitor the

conditions for airbag deployment and

deploy airbags in a crash and, if so

equipped, to provide antilock braking

to help the driver control the vehicle.

These modules may store data to

help your dealer/retailer technician

service your vehicle. Some modules

may also store data about how you

operate the vehicle, such as rate of

fuel consumption or average speed.

These modules may also retain the

owner’s personal preferences, such

as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and

temperature settings.

Customer Information 11-15

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle has an Event

Data Recorder (EDR). The main

purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an airbag

deployment or hitting a road

obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s

systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related

to vehicle dynamics and safety

systems for a short period of time,

typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed

to record such data as:

•How various systems in your

vehicle were operating

•Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened

•How far, if at all, the driver was

pressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal

•How fast the vehicle was

traveling

This data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances

in which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded

by your vehicle only if a non-trivial

crash situation occurs; no data is

recorded by the EDR under normal

driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age,

and crash location) is recorded.

However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the

EDR data with the type of personally

identifying data routinely acquired

during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,

special equipment is required,

and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer, other

parties, such as law enforcement,

that have the special equipment, can

read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR.

11-16 Customer Information

Saturn will not access this data or

share it with others except: with the

consent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with the

consent of the lessee; in response

to an official request of police or

similar government office; as part

of Saturn’s defense of litigation

through the discovery process; or,

as required by law. Data that Saturn

collects or receives may also be

used for Saturn research needs or

may be made available to others for

research purposes, where a need is

shown and the data is not tied to a

speciﬁc vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar

If your vehicle has OnStar and you

subscribe to the OnStar services,

please refer to the OnStar

Terms and Conditions for

information on data collection and

use. See also OnStar

System

on page 4-38 in this manual

for more information.

Navigation System

If your vehicle has a navigation

system, use of the system may

result in the storage of destinations,

addresses, telephone numbers, and

other trip information. Refer to the

navigation system operating manual

for information on stored data and for

deletion instructions.

Radio Frequency

Identiﬁcation (RFID)

RFID technology is used in some

vehicles for functions such as

tire pressure monitoring and ignition

system security, as well as in

connection with conveniences such

as key fobs for remote door

locking/unlocking and starting, and

in-vehicle transmitters for garage

door openers. RFID technology in

Saturn vehicles does not use

or record personal information or

link with any other Saturn system

containing personal information.

Customer Information 11-17

✍NOTES

11-18 Customer Information

Accessories and

Modiﬁcations ...................... 9-3

Accessory Power Outlets ...... 4-10

Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-35

Additives, Fuel ..................... 8-36

Add-On Electrical

Equipment ....................... 9-33

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ....... 9-11

Air Conditioning ..................... 7-1

Airbag

Passenger Status

Indicator ....................... 4-15

Readiness Light ................ 4-14

System, Replacing Parts

After a Crash ................ 1-36

Airbag System ..................... 1-23

Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ........................ 1-35

Check ............................. 1-36

How Does an Airbag

Restrain? ..................... 1-28

Servicing Your

Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ........................ 1-34

Airbag System (cont.)

What Makes an Airbag

Inﬂate? ........................ 1-28

What Will You See After

an Airbag Inﬂates? ........ 1-29

When Should an Airbag

Inﬂate? ........................ 1-27

Where Are the

Airbags? .............. 1-25, 1-30

Antenna, Fixed Mast ............ 6-25

Antilock Brake

System (ABS) .................. 8-18

Anti-lock Brake, System

Warning Light ................... 4-18

Appearance Care

Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 9-79

Exterior Cleaning .............. 9-75

Finish Damage ................. 9-79

Interior Cleaning ............... 9-72

Sheet Metal Damage ........ 9-78

Underbody Maintenance .... 9-79

Vehicle Care/Appearance

Materials ...................... 9-80

Appointments, Scheduling

Service ........................... 11-8

Audio System ........................ 6-1

Audio Steering Wheel

Controls ....................... 6-24

Fixed Mast Antenna .......... 6-25

Radio Reception ............... 6-25

Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 6-24

Audio System(s) .................... 6-2

Automatic Transmission

Fluid ............................... 9-12

Operation .......................... 8-5

Battery ............................... 9-25

Run-Down Protection .......... 5-4

Brakes ............................... 9-22

System Warning Light ....... 4-17

Braking ............................... 8-17

Break-In, New Vehicle ............ 8-2

Bulb Replacement ................ 9-28

Front Turn Signal Lamps ... 9-28

Halogen Bulbs .................. 9-28

Headlamp Aiming .............. 9-26

License Plate Lamps ......... 9-32

Replacement Bulbs ........... 9-33

Taillamps ................. 9-29, 9-30

Buying New Tires ................. 9-54

INDEX i-1

California Fuel ..................... 8-35

California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements ....... 9-3

California Proposition 65

Warning ............................ 9-3

Canadian Owners ..................... ii

Capacities and

Speciﬁcations ................... 10-2

Carbon Monoxide ......... 8-14, 8-27

Care, Safety Belts ................ 1-22

Cargo Cover ......................... 3-1

Cargo Tie Downs ................... 3-1

Cautions and Notices ............... iii

Chains, Tire ........................ 9-59

Charging System Light .......... 4-17

Check

Engine Light .................... 4-20

Chemical Paint Spotting ........ 9-79

Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ..... 1-41

Infants and Young

Children ....................... 1-38

Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children ....... 1-45

Child Restraints (cont.)

Older Children .................. 1-37

Securing .................. 1-50, 1-53

Where to Put the

Restraint ...................... 1-43

Cleaning

Exterior ........................... 9-75

Interior ............................ 9-72

Underbody Maintenance .... 9-79

Climate Control System .......... 7-1

Outlet Adjustment ............... 7-4

Clutch, Hydraulic .................. 9-12

Collision Damage Repair ..... 11-10

Compact Spare Tire ............. 9-67

Content Theft-Deterrent .......... 2-9

Control of a Vehicle .............. 8-17

Coolant

Engine ............................ 9-12

Engine Temperature

Warning Light ............... 4-19

Cooling System ................... 9-16

Cruise Control ....................... 4-5

Cruise Control Light .............. 4-24

Cupholders ........................... 3-1

Customer Assistance

Information

Courtesy

Transportation ....... 11-4, 11-8

Customer Assistance

Offices ......................... 11-5

Customer Satisfaction

Procedure .................... 11-1

GM Mobility

Reimbursement

Program ....................... 11-5

Reporting Safety

Defects to

Saturn ........................ 11-14

Reporting Safety

Defects to the

Canadian

Government ................ 11-14

Reporting Safety Defects

to the United States

Government ................ 11-13

Roadside Assistance

Program ....................... 11-5

Service Publications

Ordering Information ..... 11-14

i-2 INDEX

Daytime Running Lamps ......... 5-2

Defensive Driving ................. 8-16

Delayed Headlamps ............... 5-2

Doing Your Own

Service Work ..................... 9-4

Dome Lamps ........................ 5-3

Door

Ajar Light ........................ 4-24

Locks ............................... 2-5

Power Door Locks .............. 2-5

Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-6

Driver Information

Center (DIC) .................... 4-26

DIC Operation and

Displays ............... 4-27, 4-31

DIC Warnings and

Messages .................... 4-37

Driving

At Night .......................... 8-24

Before a Long Trip ............ 8-26

Defensive ........................ 8-16

Drunken .......................... 8-16

Highway Hypnosis ............ 8-26

Driving (cont.)

Hill and Mountain Roads .... 8-26

In Rain and on Wet

Roads ......................... 8-25

Rocking Your Vehicle to

Get it Out .................... 8-30

Winter ............................. 8-27

Winter Mode Light ............ 4-23

EDR ................................. 11-15

Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ............ 9-33

Engine Compartment

Fuse Block ................... 9-34

Fuses ............................. 9-34

Headlamp Wiring .............. 9-33

Power Windows and

Other Power

Options ........................ 9-34

Rear Compartment Fuse

Block ........................... 9-36

Windshield Wiper Fuses .... 9-34

Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ............... 9-11

Check and Service

Engine Soon

Light ............................ 4-20

Coolant ........................... 9-12

Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ............... 4-19

Engine Compartment

Overview ....................... 9-6

Exhaust ........................... 8-14

Oil ................................... 9-7

Oil Life System .................. 9-9

Overheating ..................... 9-15

Starting ............................. 8-3

Engine Heater ....................... 8-4

Entry Lighting ........................ 5-3

Event Data Recorders ......... 11-16

Extender, Safety Belt ............ 1-22

Exterior Lamps ...................... 5-1

Exterior Lamps Off

Reminder ........................ 4-24

INDEX i-3

Filter

Engine Air Cleaner ............ 9-11

Finish Damage .................... 9-79

Fixed Mast Antenna ............. 6-25

Flashers, Hazard Warning ....... 4-4

Flash-to-Pass ........................ 4-8

Flat Tire .............................. 9-60

Flat Tire, Changing ............... 9-60

Flat Tire, Storing .................. 9-66

Fluid .................................. 9-12

Automatic Transmission ..... 9-12

Power Steering ................. 9-20

Windshield Washer ........... 9-20

Fog Lamp

Fog .................................. 5-2

Fog Lamp Light ................... 4-23

Fuel ................................... 8-35

Additives ......................... 8-36

California Fuel .................. 8-35

Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ..................... 8-38

Filling the Tank ................. 8-37

Fuels in Foreign

Countries ..................... 8-36

Fuel (cont.)

Gage .............................. 4-25

Gasoline Octane ............... 8-35

Gasoline Speciﬁcations ...... 8-35

Low Warning Light ............ 4-25

Fuses ................................. 9-34

Engine Compartment

Fuse Block ................... 9-34

Rear Compartment

Fuse Block ................... 9-36

Windshield Wiper .............. 9-34

Gage

Fuel ................................ 4-25

Speedometer ................... 4-13

Tachometer ...................... 4-13

Gasoline

Octane ............................ 8-35

Speciﬁcations ................... 8-35

Glove Box ............................ 3-1

GM Mobility

Reimbursement

Program .......................... 11-5

Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 4-4

Head Restraints ..................... 1-5

Headlamp

Aiming ............................ 9-26

Headlamp Wiring ................. 9-33

Headlamps

Bulb Replacement ............. 9-28

Daytime Running Lamps ..... 5-2

Delayed ............................ 5-2

Exterior Lamps ................... 5-1

Flash-to-Pass ..................... 4-8

Front Turn Signal Lamps ... 9-28

Halogen Bulbs .................. 9-28

High/Low Beam Changer ..... 4-8

Heater ................................. 7-1

Engine .............................. 8-4

Height Adjuster, Seat .............. 1-2

Highbeam On Light .............. 4-24

High-Speed Operation,

Tires ............................... 9-47

Highway Hypnosis ................ 8-26

Hill and Mountain Roads ....... 8-26

i-4 INDEX

Hood

Release ............................ 9-5

Horn .................................... 4-4

How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly .......................... 1-12

Hydraulic Clutch ................... 9-12

Ignition Positions ................... 8-2

Immobilizer ........................... 2-7

Immobilizer Operation ............. 2-8

Infants and Young

Children, Restraints ........... 1-38

Inﬂation - Tire Pressure ......... 9-46

Instrument Panel

Brightness ......................... 5-3

Cluster ............................ 4-12

Overview ........................... 4-2

Jump Starting ...................... 9-68

Keyless Entry System ............ 2-3

Keys .................................... 2-2

Labeling, Tire Sidewall .......... 9-40

Lamp

Rear Compartment ............. 5-4

Lamps

Dome ............................... 5-3

Exterior, Off Reminder ....... 4-24

Reading ............................ 5-3

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................ 1-17

LATCH System

Child Restraints ................ 1-45

Replacing Parts After a

Crash .......................... 1-50

License Plate Lamps ............ 9-32

Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ............... 2-6

Light

Airbag Readiness ............. 4-14

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning .............. 4-18

Light (cont.)

Brake System Warning ...... 4-17

Charging System .............. 4-17

Cruise Control .................. 4-24

Door Ajar ......................... 4-24

Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning ..... 4-19

Fog Lamp ........................ 4-23

Highbeam On ................... 4-24

Low Fuel Warning ............. 4-25

Low Oil Level ................... 4-23

Malfunction Indicator ......... 4-20

Oil Pressure ..................... 4-22

Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator ....................... 4-15

Safety Belt Reminders ....... 4-14

Service Vehicle Soon ........ 4-24

StabiliTrak

Indicator ......... 4-19

Tire Pressure ................... 4-19

Winter Driving Mode .......... 4-23

Lighting

Entry ................................ 5-3

Lights

Exterior Lamps ................... 5-1

Flash-to-Pass ..................... 4-8

High/Low Beam Changer ..... 4-8

INDEX i-5

Loading Your Vehicle ............ 8-30

Locks

Door ................................. 2-5

Power Door ....................... 2-5

Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-6

Loss of Control .................... 8-23

Low Fuel Warning Light ........ 4-25

Lumbar Seat Adjustment ......... 1-3

Malfunction Indicator Light ..... 4-20

Manual Seats ........................ 1-2

Manual Transmission

Fluid ............................... 9-12

Operation .......................... 8-9

Manual, Using .......................... ii

Message

DIC Warnings and

Messages .................... 4-37

Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ..... 2-12

Outside ........................... 2-12

Outside Power Mirrors ....... 2-12

MyGMLink.com .................... 11-4

Navigation System,

Privacy .......................... 11-17

New Vehicle Break-In ............. 8-2

Notices and Cautions ............... iii

Odometer ........................... 4-13

Odometers, Trip ................... 4-13

Off-Road Recovery ............... 8-22

OilEngine .............................. 9-7

Low Oil Level Light ........... 4-23

Pressure Light .................. 4-22

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ..... 9-9

Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-37

Online Owner Center ............ 11-4

OnStar, Privacy .................. 11-17

OnStar

System, see

OnStar

Manual ............... 4-38

Outlet Adjustment .................. 7-4

Outlets

Accessory Power .............. 4-10

Outside

Mirrors ............................ 2-12

Power Mirrors .................. 2-12

Owner Checks, Service .......... 9-5

Owners, Canadian .................... ii

Paint, Damage ..................... 9-79

Park

Shifting Into ..................... 8-11

Shifting Out of .................. 8-13

Park Brake .......................... 8-10

Parking

Over Things That Burn ...... 8-13

Parking Your Vehicle ............ 8-13

Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator .......................... 4-15

Passing .............................. 8-23

Perchlorate Materials

Requirements, California ...... 9-3

Power

Door Locks ........................ 2-5

Electrical System .............. 9-34

Retained Accessory (RAP) ... 8-3

i-6 INDEX

Power (cont.)

Steering Fluid ................... 9-20

Windows ......................... 2-10

Pressure Cap ...................... 9-15

Privacy ............................. 11-15

Event Data Recorders ..... 11-16

Navigation System .......... 11-17

OnStar .......................... 11-17

Radio Frequency

Identiﬁcation ................ 11-17

Radio Frequency

Identiﬁcation (RFID),

Privacy .......................... 11-17

Radio(s) ............................... 6-2

Radios

Reception ........................ 6-25

Theft-Deterrent ................. 6-24

Reading Lamps ..................... 5-3

Rear Compartment Lamp ........ 5-4

Rear Door Security Locks ....... 2-6

Rear Heated Seats ................ 1-6

Rear Seat Operation .............. 1-7

Rear Windshield Washer/

Wiper .............................. 4-10

Rearview Mirrors .................. 2-12

Reclining Seatbacks ............... 1-3

Recreational Vehicle

Towing ............................ 9-72

Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System .................... 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System,

Operation .......................... 2-4

Removing the Flat Tire

and Installing the

Spare Tire ....................... 9-62

Removing the Spare Tire

and Tools ........................ 9-61

Replacement Bulbs .............. 9-33

Replacing LATCH

System Parts After

a Crash ........................... 1-50

Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ..... 11-14

Saturn ........................... 11-14

United States

Government ................ 11-13

Restraint System Check

Replacing Airbag System

Parts After a Crash ........ 1-36

Replacing Safety Belt

System Parts After

a Crash ....................... 1-23

Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) ..................... 8-3

Roadside

Assistance Program .......... 11-5

Rocking Your Vehicle

to Get it Out .................... 8-30

Running the Vehicle

While Parked ................... 8-14

INDEX i-7

Safety Belts .......................... 1-8

Care of ........................... 1-22

Check ............................. 1-22

How to Wear Safety

Belts Properly ............... 1-12

Lap-Shoulder Belt ............. 1-17

Reminder Light ................. 4-14

Replacing Parts After

a Crash ....................... 1-23

Safety Belt Extender ......... 1-22

Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy .................... 1-21

Seats

Head Restraints ................. 1-5

Heated Seats - Rear ........... 1-6

Height Adjuster .................. 1-2

Lumbar Adjustment ............. 1-3

Rear Seat Operation ........... 1-7

Reclining Seatbacks ............ 1-3

Securing Child

Restraints ................ 1-50, 1-53

Service ................................ 9-2

Accessories and

Modiﬁcations .................. 9-3

Adding Equipment to the

Outside of the Vehicle ..... 9-4

California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements .... 9-3

California Proposition 65

Warning ......................... 9-3

Doing Your Own Work ........ 9-4

Engine Soon Light ............ 4-20

Owner Checks ................... 9-5

Publications Ordering

Information ................. 11-14

Vehicle Soon Light ............ 4-24

Service, Scheduling

Appointments ................... 12-8

Servicing Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-34

Sheet Metal Damage ............ 9-78

Shifting Into Park ................. 8-11

Shifting Out of Park .............. 8-13

Signals, Turn and

Lane-Change ..................... 4-8

Spare Tire

Compact ......................... 9-67

Installing .......................... 9-62

Removing ........................ 9-61

Storing ............................ 9-66

Speciﬁcations, Capacities ...... 10-2

Speedometer ....................... 4-13

StabiliTrak

Indicator Light ..... 4-19

Stabilitrak

System ............... 8-19

Starting the Engine ................ 8-3

Steering .............................. 8-20

Steering Wheel Controls,

Audio .............................. 6-24

Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ...... 4-4

Storage Areas

Cupholders ........................ 3-1

Glove Box ......................... 3-1

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,

or Snow .......................... 8-29

Sun Visors .......................... 2-11

Sunroof .............................. 2-13

i-8 INDEX

Tachometer ......................... 4-13

Taillamps .................... 9-29, 9-30

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ........... 6-24

Theft-Deterrent Systems ......... 2-7

Content Theft-Deterrent ....... 2-9

Immobilizer ........................ 2-7

Immobilizer Operation ......... 2-8

Tilt Wheel ............................. 4-4

Tire

Pressure Light .................. 4-19

Tires .................................. 9-38

Buying New Tires ............. 9-54

Chains ............................ 9-59

Changing a Flat Tire ......... 9-60

Compact Spare Tire .......... 9-67

Different Size ................... 9-55

High-Speed Operation ....... 9-47

If a Tire Goes Flat ............ 9-60

Inﬂation - Tire Pressure ..... 9-46

Tires (cont.)

Inspection and Rotation ..... 9-51

Installing the Spare Tire ..... 9-62

Pressure Monitor

Operation ..................... 9-50

Pressure Monitor

System ........................ 9-48

Removing the Flat Tire ...... 9-62

Removing the Spare

Tire and Tools ............... 9-61

Storing a Flat or Spare

Tire and Tools ............... 9-66

Tire Sidewall Labeling ....... 9-40

Tire Terminology and

Deﬁnitions .................... 9-43

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ....................... 9-56

Wheel Alignment and

Tire Balance ................. 9-58

Wheel Replacement .......... 9-58

Tires (cont.)

When It Is Time for

New Tires .................... 9-53

Winter Tires ..................... 9-39

Towing

Recreational Vehicle .......... 9-72

Towing a Trailer ................ 9-72

Your Vehicle ..................... 9-72

Traction

Stabilitrak

System ........... 8-19

Transmission

Fluid, Automatic ................ 9-12

Fluid, Manual ................... 9-12

Transmission Operation,

Automatic .......................... 8-5

Transmission Operation,

Manual ............................. 8-9

Trip Odometers .................... 4-13

Turn and Lane-Change

Signals ............................. 4-8

Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever ................................ 4-4

INDEX i-9

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ........................... 9-56

Using this Manual ..................... ii

Vehicle

Control ............................ 8-17

Loading ........................... 8-30

Parking Your .................... 8-13

Running While Parked ....... 8-14

Service Soon Light ........... 4-24

Symbols .............................. iii

Vehicle Data Recording

and Privacy .................... 11-15

Vehicle Identiﬁcation

Number (VIN) ................... 10-1

Service Parts

Identiﬁcation Label ......... 10-1

Ventilation Adjustment ............. 7-4

Visors ................................. 2-11

Warning Lights, Gages

and Indicators .................. 4-11

Warnings

DIC Warnings and

Messages .................... 4-37

Hazard Warning Flashers .... 4-4

Wheels

Alignment and Tire

Balance ....................... 9-58

Different Size ................... 9-55

Replacement .................... 9-58

Where to Put the Restraint .... 1-43

Windows ............................. 2-10

Power ............................. 2-10

Windshield

Washer ........................... 4-10

Washer Fluid .................... 9-20

Wiper Blade

Replacement ................ 9-21

Windshield (cont.)

Wiper Fuses .................... 9-34

Wipers .............................. 4-9

Windshield, Rear Washer/

Wiper .............................. 4-10

Winter Driving ...................... 8-27

Winter Driving Mode Light ..... 4-23

Winter Tires ........................ 9-39

i-10 INDEX

Saturn 2008 Astra Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation